久久99精品久久久久久琪琪,久久人人爽人人爽人人片亞洲,熟妇人妻无码中文字幕,亚洲精品无码久久久久久久

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案

時(shí)間:2019-05-15 07:42:08下載本文作者:會(huì)員上傳
簡(jiǎn)介:寫(xiě)寫(xiě)幫文庫(kù)小編為你整理了多篇相關(guān)的《劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案》,但愿對(duì)你工作學(xué)習(xí)有幫助,當(dāng)然你在寫(xiě)寫(xiě)幫文庫(kù)還可以找到更多《劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案》。

第一篇:劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案

更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

Unit 1 Greetings Teaching aims and demands:

1)can use simple English greet others 2)can say“Good morning!” “Good afternoon “Good evening” 3)Can read the new words about letter A a 4)can speak out the sentences of part 7

二、Important and difficult points: What?s this? It?s the letter Aa.Good morning!Good afternoon!Good evening.Hello!Hi!Slide

三、Teaching Steps : Step1 Greetings:

Good morning /afternoon!Boys and girls how are you today? ……

Ask one student to stand up and say Hello to him or her.and encourage him or her to answer “hello!” Then ask some other students to practice this sentence.Step 2:Call their names and say hello to them.Hello Ming Ming Hello, Dan Dan.Hello Fang Fang …… Step 3: Presentation Show the students some pictures about morning and ask, what?s the picture say?----Morning, Yes, its morning teach the new word.Then show another picture and then teach the word afternoon and the same way to the word evening.Step 4: After learning the short sentences, we will learn an English song, teach the song and practice in groups or in pairs Step 5: show a model slide(this is a slide, what does it like? Yes, it likes the letter Aa).Write the letter Aa on the blackboard and teach the letter A a A is the slide, Slide on the A a.Step 6 teach the words about the letter A a : ape ace alien then practice some times.Step 7 Teach them how to write letter Aa Step 8 :Do some exercises 1)Do the exercises on page 4 of the students? book 2)match them 3)Good morning Hello!Good night.Good afternoon.Good evening.Good morning.Hello!Good night.Good afternoon!Good evening 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

Unit 2 who is the first Teaching aims and demands : *They can understand some simple actions and do it;*They can do “Stand up “”Sit down”,” Come here “, “Go back “., * Can understand the meaning of “up “and “”down”.*Can read B b and some new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 5

二、Important and difficult points What?s this? Stand up.Sit down.Come here.Go back Hands pens pencils feet cat snail back bee ball beef

三、teaching method: 本單元的教學(xué)重點(diǎn)是游戲,通過(guò)大家一起做動(dòng)作來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ),也就是我們常說(shuō)的,“玩中學(xué),學(xué)中玩”。教師一到課堂里就可以邊做手勢(shì)邊說(shuō),Now ,stand up ,sit down, Stand up!sit down.說(shuō)的時(shí)候可以先慢后快,也可以讓學(xué)生無(wú)法預(yù)料。大家基本上不出什么錯(cuò)誤的時(shí)候,教師就可以跑到教室的后面叫一個(gè)同學(xué)說(shuō),Come here!Come here!等到學(xué)生來(lái)了之后,教師可以說(shuō)Go back.Go back.Go back.然后再叫另外的同學(xué),在這四個(gè)句子中來(lái)回變換花樣,最好是時(shí)常有所變化。等大家熟悉了以后,、讓大家一起來(lái)說(shuō)順口溜,Up, Up, stand up.Down, down, sit down.Here, here, come here.Back ,back, go back.邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。然后教師開(kāi)始用實(shí)物來(lái)做替換練習(xí)。如,Hands up!Hands down.Hands up, hands down.Books up.Books down.等等。

當(dāng)大家累了的時(shí)候,就讓大家休息一下,來(lái)給圖畫(huà)著色。著色之后再讓大家相互觀看,看誰(shuí)色彩上的好。接下來(lái)便是教字母的時(shí)間。教師首先讓學(xué)生們看兩個(gè)字母的卡片或形象的圖片(貓和蝸牛)。邊看大寫(xiě)B(tài)的時(shí)候,邊說(shuō)Big B is a cat.然后拿小寫(xiě)b說(shuō),Small b is a snail.The cat and the snail.They are the letter Bb,等.讓大家反復(fù)說(shuō),反復(fù)練習(xí),然后,讓小組的同學(xué)進(jìn)行朗誦比賽,看看哪個(gè)組最好。在學(xué)字母的時(shí)候,注意把這幾個(gè)詞給學(xué)生,讓他們練習(xí)一下。其中還有:bee, ball, beet字母組合等。在適當(dāng)?shù)臅r(shí)候,讓學(xué)生放松一下,可以隨時(shí)讓他們做一些動(dòng)作,即復(fù)習(xí)了所學(xué)內(nèi)容,有有助于學(xué)生上課保持新鮮感,更有興趣參與到學(xué)習(xí)中來(lái)。

請(qǐng)一個(gè)學(xué)生到講臺(tái)上去做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)在下面說(shuō)他做的動(dòng)作,看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得最快最準(zhǔn)確,老師可適當(dāng)給予獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。然后再換其他同學(xué)去,做到充分練習(xí)。四、Exercises : 1.Read and do: Stand up.Sit down.Come here Go back pen up.Pencil down Books up.Feed down…… 2.Let?s chant

A.Up, up, stand up.Down, down,sit down.Here, here, come here.Back, back, go 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

back.Up, up, stand up.Down, down, sit down Up, up, books up.Down down pencils down.Up up pens up, down down feet down.B Good morning, mummy!Good morning, daddy!Good afternoon, teacher!Good evening, my little cat!C.Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pen down!Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pencil down!

Unit 3 Catch and run Teaching aims and demands: *Can understand some simple actions and do it *Know the meaning of “catch、run.”

*Can read and write letter Bb and can read the new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 7 on page 11

二、Important and difficult points: catch!Run to the …… door table window boys girls blackboard teacher flowers cab cap

三、Teaching method and steps: Step1:Bring some toys to the classroom at the beginning of the class, throw them to the classes one by one and say: Catch!If they can understand what?s meaning, take out the pictures show to them and teach the new words: ball, door, window, blackboard, teacher, flowers Step2: Go to the playground play games and learn: Please be ready.Run!Group them into boys and girls.Have a rally race.Then queue in a line, do some actions(Who is the fastest): Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Then chant it and do it: Catch a ball, run to the door.Catch a pen, run to Ben.Catch a pencil, run to the middle.Catch, run, catch, run, catch and run.Step3:Go back to the classroom, have a rest, then color it on page 12.then listen and circles on page 12 Step4:take a piece of paper and ask them ?What?s this ?It?s a piece of paper ,yes ,now cut it into a shape of big moon ,and then ask :What?s this now ?---Yes ,it?s moon.What does it look like ike a smiling face , like the letter C c.Who said it likes letter C c ,will be prized.Say: c is the moon, C c is the moon.We are on the moon, we are on the moon.Step5: Show them pictures and teach: cab, cap, and cat.Can add some words 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

about Cc.Step6: Teach them how to write letter Cc.Step7: Exercises: Speak out and do actions: Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Stand!Sit!Catch!Run!Ask and answer in pairs: What?s this? It?s a big C.What?s this? It?s a small c.Practice reading and writing letter C c

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

Unit 4 Color it green

一、Teaching aims and demands:

*can understand and speak out the words about some colors *they can do color the things after the order *使學(xué)生能用兩種問(wèn)句問(wèn)問(wèn)題

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分和練習(xí)1中所給的句子和單詞

二、交際句型:

Color it green.What color do you like? Which is the blue duck?

三、交際詞匯: pink, green, indigo, red, yellow, purple

四、具體教學(xué)方法:

可以首先拿出一只剪好的白色鴨子對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),This is a duck.This is a duck.I have many ducks.Look, one, two, three, four and five.They are white.Do you know“white”? Now , this is indigo.This is red.教師拿出兩種顏色給學(xué)生看。接著教師用剛才的鴨子舉例,說(shuō),Look here,this is a white duck.This is a indigo duck.Now, look, I have many ducks on the blackboard.What color are they? This is a white duck, this is a indigo duck.從剛才新教的詞匯開(kāi)始,然后再教新的顏色詞,每教一個(gè)新詞之前要復(fù)習(xí)一下剛學(xué)過(guò)的詞,可以將鴨子貼在黑板上,下面再貼上與鴨子顏色一樣的光電紙,然后,教師指著鴨子說(shuō),This is a duck.It's blue.It's a blue duck.然后教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can say the sentences about these ducks?鼓勵(lì)同學(xué)們到前面來(lái)描述。當(dāng)一兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)完之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

接下來(lái),教師選出一些漂亮、鮮艷的顏色,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),I've got lots of colors.What color do you like? 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

問(wèn)不同的同學(xué),如果該學(xué)生說(shuō),I like green.教師就給該生一個(gè)綠色的小蘋(píng)果(事先剪好不同顏色的蘋(píng)果或其它圖案)

教師教字母D d的時(shí)候,可以直接拿出D字母,然后再拿出帶有豎琴的圖片進(jìn)行比較,同時(shí)帶著大家一起說(shuō),Big D is a harp.Small d is a chair.The girl is sitting on the chair, playing the harp.教師邊說(shuō)邊指著圖片和字母Dd.接著教師說(shuō),Look here.What’s this? It’s a dog.D-dog.What's this? It’s a doll.D-doll.教師帶著大家朗讀D字母音的同時(shí),可以帶出的讀音,并讓學(xué)生看圖片。

在做練習(xí)的時(shí)候,教師引導(dǎo)大家看畫(huà)有彩虹的圖。教師可以說(shuō),Look, we've got a nice rainbow on page 16.This is a rainbow.It has seven colors.Let's see.What color are they? 這時(shí)教師啟發(fā)學(xué)生說(shuō)出這七種顏色。

在做練習(xí)3時(shí),教師先讓大家把圖涂上顏色,然后可以在全班進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)涂色涂的最好。具體操作如下:教師可以讓學(xué)生一行一行地拿著自己的課本到前面來(lái),大家進(jìn)行推薦。最后表彰前十名同學(xué)。

五、課后作業(yè):

一、.Draw five ducks with different colors and write each color next to the duck.辨認(rèn)dog doll door

二、.Read and draw: 1)A cat,2)Flowers 3)A cap.4)A dog.三、.Write down the words which have letter “D d”.door cat boy doll duck

blue pink red yellow color

dog green pencil indigo ace

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

Unit 5 Let’s play

一、Teaching aims and demands * 使學(xué)生能正確地做出向右轉(zhuǎn),向左轉(zhuǎn)的動(dòng)作 * 讓學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)出拍手歌歌謠

* 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ee 及所給單詞的讀音 * 使學(xué)生能讀出第四部分所給出的句子

二、交際句型:Turn right Turn left Hold your hands and stand in a circle You have one, I have one.Two little children see a big man.三、交際詞匯: one ,two ,three ,four ,five ,a boy ,four boys ,a girl ,four girls

四、教學(xué)用具:蘋(píng)果,梨,香蕉,帽子的有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨镒帜傅拇笮?xiě)及單詞讀音圖片。

五、具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí),先讓學(xué)生做一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)作,比如,Stand in two lines.Turn right.Turn left.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這些句子的時(shí)候,幫他們完成動(dòng)作,以至于讓他們理解這幾句話的意思然后,集體一起說(shuō)課文的第2部分。當(dāng)學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)這些內(nèi)容以后,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行表演,邊表演邊說(shuō)。這里教師特別要注意全班同學(xué)的整體性,不要讓任何人掉隊(duì)。所以,練習(xí)的遍數(shù)要多,人員要普遍,不要留死角。換句話說(shuō),全班的每一個(gè)人要有充分的練習(xí)時(shí)間。在做這部分的時(shí)候,讓所有的學(xué)生都參與到這個(gè)活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái),在游戲活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái)領(lǐng)略新的知識(shí)。

在學(xué)習(xí)完第1,2部分后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家進(jìn)行單,復(fù)數(shù)概念的練習(xí),由于是初次與學(xué)生見(jiàn)面,所以教師只通過(guò)數(shù)數(shù)的方式,讓學(xué)生知道1~5的含義就可以了,至于說(shuō)a boy , four boys , a girl ,four girls ,也只是讓學(xué)生知道有變化而已。

在學(xué)習(xí)字母E e的時(shí)候,教師首先拿出字母E e卡片,然后再引導(dǎo)學(xué)生看教材的Ee字母的變形圖。同時(shí)帶領(lǐng)大家一起說(shuō),Big E is for sail ,small e is for whale.The ship has a sail, sailing behind the whale.教師說(shuō)此段內(nèi)容時(shí),可以用節(jié)奏的方式說(shuō),并讓學(xué)生拍著節(jié)奏說(shuō)。經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)邊的練習(xí),然后進(jìn)行組與組之間的比賽。

在學(xué)生大聲朗讀之后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家學(xué)習(xí)字母組合的讀音。首先教師強(qiáng)調(diào)的讀音,然后直接以拼音的方式拼出單詞即可。比如,b—e-e=bee ,f—e-e—t=feet等,教師只要帶領(lǐng)拼讀就行了。

六、教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and act 上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK , everyone.Stand up.Sit down.Stand up.Turn right.Turn left.Stand in two lines.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這部分的內(nèi)容的時(shí)候,教師一定要伴隨一定的動(dòng)作,不然學(xué)生不會(huì)理解,也不會(huì)去做動(dòng)作,Hands up , one ,two(拍手)Hands down , one, two(拍手).Hands right, one , two(拍手)Hands left , one two(拍手)。做這個(gè)活動(dòng)時(shí),教師可以先由慢再逐漸加快,特別是說(shuō),hands up ,one ,two 的時(shí)候可以快一些,讓整個(gè)的句子富有節(jié)奏感。教學(xué)活動(dòng) 2 pat-a-cake 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)此段歌謠的最后方法是兩個(gè)人一組,一邊拍手,一邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)的句子。甚至教師在拍手的空隙間可以加進(jìn)一個(gè)動(dòng)作(比如,高大的人,上學(xué),種樹(shù)等動(dòng)作)。在大家熟練的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還可以讓同學(xué)們之間進(jìn)行比賽,比拍手的協(xié)調(diào)性及英語(yǔ)句字的準(zhǔn)確性等。在用英語(yǔ)教學(xué)時(shí),教師只需簡(jiǎn)單講一下即可。如,now ,everyone , let’s play Pat-a-cake.Do you know? Let `s try it.You have one, I have one, two little children see a big man.Do you understand? Let `s do it in pairs.First you do it after me.Ready? Let `s start.教學(xué)活動(dòng) 3 Color it!

教師上課前復(fù)印好若干張黑白圖片。上課時(shí),讓學(xué)生著色比賽。黑板圖片的選擇可以是自行畫(huà)的,也可以從某教材中復(fù)印下來(lái),但筆畫(huà)不宜太多太難。

七、課后作業(yè)

與爸爸媽媽一起說(shuō)拍手歌。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

unit6 Hide and seek

教學(xué)目的和要求

* 使學(xué)生通過(guò)游戲活動(dòng)培養(yǎng)對(duì)英語(yǔ)的興趣 * 使學(xué)生初步掌握簡(jiǎn)單的指令 * 使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉所學(xué)的顏色 * 使學(xué)生掌握字母及相關(guān)單詞的讀音 交際句型:Show me your book , please.Here you are Quick!Hide your pencil.Where is it ? 交際詞匯: Pencil, crayon , eraser ,behind my back , in the desk 教學(xué)用具:鉛筆,橡皮,蠟筆,書(shū),書(shū)包,圖片及實(shí)物 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí)首先拿給學(xué)生們看一件較新鮮的東西。教師說(shuō),Look!I’ve got something in my bag.Ah,here it is.這時(shí)教師拿出一件特殊的玩具,讓學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Let me show you another thing.Look,here it is.Is it good? 學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Look ,let me show you my new pen.This is my pen.It’s new.說(shuō)到此,教師突然問(wèn),Li Ming , have you got a pen ?Show me your pen , please.(講此話時(shí),教師一定要用手勢(shì))Wang Fang, show me your book, please.Thank you.Now, everybody, practice it in pairs.You say ,Show me your pencil , please.’教師邊說(shuō)邊給出節(jié)奏,這樣,學(xué)生就容易上口。

在教本單元時(shí)教師不要太性急,特別是前面的幾部分,教師要一部分一部分地進(jìn)行。比如,教師說(shuō),Now hide your pencil.Quick!Hide your pencil 然后教師去找.Ah ,here.Ah , in the desk.Ah, behind your back 等等。然后,教師再對(duì)大家說(shuō),.Now hide your book!Hide your book.接著更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

教師又開(kāi)始找,然后再說(shuō),Hide your pen.Hide your eraser.等等。

進(jìn)行第二步驟時(shí),教師說(shuō),Who can come here and hide my book?等到學(xué)生藏好以后,教師說(shuō)Where is it? Where is it?邊說(shuō)邊找。

接下來(lái),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, now, let’s play a game ,Who wants to be here?當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)后,教師讓他/她閉上眼睛,或者面對(duì)黑板,然后讓某個(gè)人把東西藏起來(lái).藏好后教師讓這個(gè)學(xué)生問(wèn)OK ,where ’s the pencil ? where’s it? 大家一起說(shuō),There it is!There it is!教師帶領(lǐng)大家做這個(gè)游戲時(shí),應(yīng)該練習(xí)說(shuō)第4部分的內(nèi)容。

大家活動(dòng)了一會(huì)兒后,教師拿出字母卡片,讓大家跟讀發(fā)音,同時(shí)給出幾個(gè)詞,如,(課文中出現(xiàn)的)face ,flag ,foot.并讓大家看跳臺(tái),同時(shí)說(shuō)出該段的順口溜-----Diving-platform, diving-platform ,Ff is the diving-platform, Boys are diving ,girls aye diving ,Ff is the diving-platform.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and point 教師首先不讓同學(xué)們看書(shū),而是問(wèn)大家Where is the door?大家用手指門(mén).Where is the TV? Where is the table? Where is the blackboard? Where is ?? Where are the windows?等等.大家對(duì)這個(gè)句型了解了之后,教師再讓大家打開(kāi)書(shū),聽(tīng)錄音, 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Colour it!教師讓大家準(zhǔn)備好彩色筆,然后將本單元第6部分的圖片上色,但要規(guī)定時(shí)間,教師可這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)Now , everyone ,pleas take out your crayons.let’s colour the pictures on page 22.We ‘ve got eight pictures.You have 3 minutes(教師指表)Let’s see who is the first and whose pictures are the best.Now ,are you ready? Start!教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 LISTEN and circle 在學(xué)習(xí)完了第7部分的內(nèi)容之后,教師可以安排聽(tīng)力內(nèi)容.練習(xí)2的答案是:1(d)2(b)3(c)4 課后作業(yè)

每人回家在紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩,男孩,女孩都可以,并給孩子取個(gè)名字。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)unit7 Point to your nose

教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)人體面部的各個(gè)部位 *使學(xué)生能清楚地辨認(rèn)人體的主要部位

*使學(xué)生初步掌握I have ?This is? There are?的句型 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Gg及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:

What’s this? It’s a nose.What are these ? They’re eyes.Point to your nose.This is my mouth.These are my feet.I have two ears.更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

交際詞匯:Nose, mouth , face, eyes, teeth, feet, hands, legs, arms, hair 教學(xué)用具:教學(xué)圖片(人身體的各個(gè)部位)娃娃兩個(gè)(男女各一個(gè))具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿一個(gè)布娃娃開(kāi)始,教師說(shuō),Look ,I’ve got a beautiful girl.Her name is Mary.She’s 6 years old.Now ,let’s see.This is her face , nose and mouth..These are her eyes, ears and teeth.Now follow me ,face ,nose ,mouth ,eyes ,ears ,teeth.Now ,who wants to come here and show us her face ?Very good.Now you say each part and everybody follows you.(這時(shí)讓全班同學(xué)跟他一起說(shuō)。)重復(fù)類(lèi)似幾遍之后,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, listen and act.Point to your nose.Point to your face ,point to your mouth.point to your eyes.point to your ears.point to your teeth.教師在做此活動(dòng)時(shí),可以采取不同的形式。比如,教師說(shuō),全班同學(xué)一起做;也可以采取同桌的同學(xué)一個(gè)人說(shuō),一個(gè)人做;也可以找一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面給指令,大家一起做。總之,教學(xué)的目的是讓大家盡快熟悉所學(xué)的單詞和句型。

接下來(lái),教師可以組織大家一起玩Simon says的游戲。教師說(shuō),Simon says,Touch your face.touch your nose.Simon says,Touch your ears.等游戲之后,教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)本單元的第3部分。說(shuō)這一部分的時(shí)候,教師要帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起邊說(shuō)邊做,由慢到快,最好還有節(jié)奏。這樣,同學(xué)能夠很快的掌握此段內(nèi)容。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多的情況下,教師可以給出I Have?的句型。教師首先講I have two eyes.I have a nose.I have two ears.I have a mouth.I have many teeth.I have black hair.起初,學(xué)生并不知道have是什么意思,教師只需在黑板上寫(xiě)有,而不需整句話進(jìn)行翻譯。

然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例,I have a face.I have a mouth.I have two ears.I have two eyes等等。教師說(shuō)完之后,馬上找一兩個(gè)同學(xué)復(fù)述,最后再讓全班同學(xué)兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

在個(gè)人和集體練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師再帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起活動(dòng)做練習(xí)5,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Ok, everybody ,let’s do a game.Stand up pleas!Everybody!Follow me.Head ,head, touch your head?(按照課文的內(nèi)容把動(dòng)作做完)如果大家做的好,紀(jì)律也比較好,接著做第4部分的Chant it.這也要求邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。教師要特別注意,學(xué)生不僅要會(huì)做動(dòng)作,更重要的是會(huì)說(shuō)每一句話。所以盡量多練習(xí),反復(fù)練習(xí)。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多,感到比較累的時(shí)候,教師接著進(jìn)行字母教學(xué)。教師可以先示范,拿著字母G g說(shuō),This is G g.Yes, it’s G g(重復(fù)幾遍)。在學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō),逐漸會(huì)了的情況下,教師自然帶出順口溜。Mum is a big G.A baby’s on a small g.Mum and the baby ,they are very happy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1Listen and touch 教師自己可以在一張紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)大兔子。上課時(shí),將兔子的圖掛在黑板上,讓兩個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),聽(tīng)指令,做動(dòng)作,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)動(dòng)作快,動(dòng)作慢的同學(xué)回座位,再換另一個(gè)人。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),look ,I’ve got a big rabbit here.I’ m putting this on the blackboard.I want two pupils to come to the front.I say ‘ear’, they touch the ear.I say `mouth’ ,they touch the mouth, do you understand ?Who wants to come here? Good , Let’s begin.Nose ,… 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Chanting match 教師教完第4部分之后,讓同學(xué)們進(jìn)行說(shuō)唱比賽可以采取男生和女生分開(kāi)的方式,也可以采取一組一組的方式。看看哪個(gè)組說(shuō)得做得最好。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 教師在黑板上畫(huà)一個(gè)沒(méi)有鼻子的孩子,然后,讓學(xué)生上來(lái)給這個(gè)孩子貼鼻子。教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)用紙畫(huà)好,剪好的鼻子。上來(lái)的同學(xué)要離黑板有一定的距離。教師要用布將孩子的眼睛蒙更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

住,然后讓學(xué)生轉(zhuǎn)兩個(gè)圈,再開(kāi)始貼鼻子,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)貼的位置最準(zhǔn)確。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, we’ve got a boy here ,but he has no nose.(手勢(shì))Who can come here and put the nose on his face? 等同學(xué)上來(lái)之后,教師說(shuō)Good, but we have to cover your eyes.You have to turn around twice.Ok., go and stick the nose on the boy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Draw and show 上節(jié)課結(jié)束的時(shí)候,教師給大家留了一個(gè)作業(yè),讓每個(gè)人回家畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩。這一次,教師利用上課的機(jī)會(huì)進(jìn)行點(diǎn)評(píng)。首先,教師在黑板前拴上一個(gè)線繩,然后讓孩子把圖片用曲別針掛在線繩上,最后讓全班同學(xué)進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看看哪個(gè)同學(xué)畫(huà)的最好。然后,教師給予一定獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。通常獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)的人數(shù)應(yīng)盡量達(dá)到四分之一,這樣,孩子感到稍加努力,都能得到獎(jiǎng)品。課后作業(yè):

Draw an animal of any kind and write down its nose ,mouth, ears ,teeth ,etc.(在一張紙上畫(huà)任何一種動(dòng)物,并用英語(yǔ)寫(xiě)上那兒是鼻子,嘴。耳朵,牙齒等。)

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

unit8 How many doors?

1使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉1`5的數(shù)字 2 使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)6~10的數(shù)字 3 使學(xué)生加深對(duì)單`復(fù)數(shù)的概念 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母及所給單詞的讀音 5 使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型: How many doors? It’s a book.This is Hh.It’s letter H h

交際詞匯: One?ten, orange ,pear, apple, banana ,door, window , chair, TV ,book , pen ,pencile 教學(xué)用具:1~10的單詞卡,有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨铮〔伎诖瑥椙蛉舾蓚€(gè)。小獎(jiǎng)品,字母的大小寫(xiě)及掛圖的圖片。具體教學(xué)方式:

首先教師拿1~10的數(shù)字讓學(xué)生看,同時(shí)教師用英語(yǔ)發(fā)每個(gè)數(shù)字的讀音,然后教師讓大家跟著一起說(shuō)這些數(shù)子。教師也可以拿一些書(shū)本來(lái)數(shù),邊數(shù)邊說(shuō)。講復(fù)數(shù)概念的時(shí)候,教師只需先拿起一本書(shū),說(shuō)a book,然后再拿起一本書(shū),把兩本書(shū)放在一起時(shí)說(shuō),two books教師特別要強(qiáng)調(diào)的發(fā)音,以便引起學(xué)生的注意。然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例說(shuō)a desk, two desks ,a table,two tables ,a door, two doors, a pen ,two pens, a pencil, two pencils等。教師舉例之后,馬上讓學(xué)生來(lái)說(shuō),教師說(shuō)第一部分,讓學(xué)生說(shuō)第2部分。比如,教師說(shuō)a book,并馬上把兩本書(shū)放在一起,示意大家說(shuō),two books,?大家熟悉了復(fù)數(shù)的概念時(shí),教師就可以引入課文中的內(nèi)容。,比如one orange ,two pears, three apples ,four bananas如果有實(shí)物或圖,就用實(shí)物或圖來(lái)說(shuō)明。最后帶著大家一起認(rèn)讀。更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

接著,教師可以采取的教學(xué)活動(dòng)進(jìn)一步帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生辨認(rèn)這些詞。教師說(shuō)一個(gè)詞,讓學(xué)生迅速用手指出來(lái)。比如,學(xué)生馬上就指,教師的語(yǔ)速也可以由慢到快。

其次,教師帶領(lǐng)大家一起做第2部分練習(xí)。首先,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組自己做。教師這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)學(xué)生做了一會(huì)兒以后,教師說(shuō),如果大家回答的很順利,教師讓大家看第4部分。還是先兩人一組練習(xí),然后,一組一組的進(jìn)行對(duì)話問(wèn)答。

本單元第5 部分是讓學(xué)生自己畫(huà)畫(huà),教師應(yīng)該給學(xué)生規(guī)定時(shí)間,看那個(gè)同學(xué)在最短的時(shí)間內(nèi)畫(huà)出最好的的香蕉和蘋(píng)果。注意,教師進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)時(shí),應(yīng)只表?yè)P(yáng)畫(huà)一個(gè)蘋(píng)果和一個(gè)香蕉的同學(xué),同時(shí)要提醒畫(huà)的多的同學(xué)認(rèn)真看文字要求

本單元第7 部分是學(xué)習(xí)字母部分,教師可以先讓同學(xué)們看掛圖,讓大家猜掛圖畫(huà)的是什么,如果大家說(shuō)出是樹(shù)和房子時(shí),教師拿出字母卡,讓大家進(jìn)行比較,順便引出順口溜。教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)小布袋,里面裝有一些玻璃球。

兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)unit9 Tell your friends.*使學(xué)生能向別人做簡(jiǎn)單的自我介紹 *使學(xué)生初步學(xué)會(huì)使用I’m的句型

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ii及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第5部分所給出的句子 交際句型:I'm Dongdong.I'm six.I'm a

boy.I like toy cars.交際詞匯:boy ,toy, car, girl , doll 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師首先用一個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做自我介紹,教師可以藏在布娃娃的后面,模仿小娃娃的的說(shuō)話聲,說(shuō),Hello, My name is Mary.I'm Mary.I'm six.I'm a

girl.I like dolls.當(dāng)說(shuō)到dolls的時(shí)候,教師應(yīng)拿起兩個(gè)其他的布娃娃,放在該娃娃的手里。然后,教師再重復(fù)一遍。說(shuō)完之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can come here and say like this ?教師找一個(gè)或兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)之后,讓大家再聽(tīng)第二段。Very good,now,listen to me.I have another friend.His name is Tom.說(shuō)到此教師拿起第二個(gè)娃娃,說(shuō),Hello, I'm Tom.I'm seven.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.說(shuō)完之后,教師重復(fù)一遍。然后,繼續(xù)讓兩三個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái)說(shuō)這個(gè)Tom。在大家都知道內(nèi)容的情況下,教師對(duì)同學(xué)說(shuō),Now you know my friends already.Who can come here and talk about yourself.Who wants to try?You can say, I'm ***教師舉班上一個(gè)人名為例,I'm 7.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.Who wants to try? Very good.Come here!等兩三個(gè)學(xué)生結(jié)束后,教師對(duì)全班說(shuō),now, practise it in pairs.在學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分別向五個(gè)學(xué)生介紹自己,并且加上Hello,Good morning.I'm...最后再說(shuō),Goodbye!這樣通過(guò)大量的練習(xí),使學(xué)生能在課堂就掌握這句型。課后作業(yè): 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

Listen to Unit 10 three times.unit10 Let's do it.*使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂用英語(yǔ)說(shuō)的簡(jiǎn)單指令 *使學(xué)生能進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)文具用品

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Jj及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Put the ruler in your

hand.This is a ruler.That is a crayon.交際詞匯:book, pencil-box,crayon, ruler, window, door, boy, girl.具體教學(xué)方式:

在前面的幾個(gè)單元中,我們都先后學(xué)習(xí)了一些文具用品的單詞,但本單元的重點(diǎn)在于復(fù)習(xí)這些文具用品的單詞,并能了解一些介詞的基本位置,如,in , on ,under ,between及next to,并圍繞介詞來(lái)開(kāi)展一些活動(dòng)。上課開(kāi)始時(shí),教師可以拿著已經(jīng)熟悉的文具問(wèn)學(xué)生們,What's this ?What's

that?當(dāng)學(xué)生熟悉這些單詞后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起做動(dòng)作。教師說(shuō),Put the book on your hand.讓大家馬上做動(dòng)作,然后,教師接著說(shuō),Put the ruler in your hand.Put the book under your chair.除了這三句話以外,教師還可以說(shuō),Put your book in your bag.Put the pencil in your pencil-box.Put the book between the two pencils.Put the crayon

next to the book.等

教師做這些動(dòng)作時(shí),讓學(xué)生跟著一起模仿,而不要一上課就給學(xué)生解釋什么是介詞。

做完一遍動(dòng)作后,教師還可以繼續(xù)用別的句子來(lái)鞏固剛才所練習(xí)的內(nèi)容,比如,Put the pen on your desk.Put the

book in your hand.等。然后教師用一個(gè)乒乓球和一個(gè)粉筆盒給學(xué)生單個(gè)示范,The ball is on the box.The ball is in the box.The ball is under the box.The ball is between the two boxes.The ball is next to the box.Put the ball behind the box.在教師解釋的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓每個(gè)人都拿著一支鉛筆跟老師一起說(shuō)、一起做。

經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)遍的練習(xí)后,教師要讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行描述,最后選幾個(gè)人在全班進(jìn)行描述。此外,還可以進(jìn)行其它教學(xué)活動(dòng)。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the chant in the next Unit and say it with the tape.預(yù)習(xí)下單元中的說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。

unit11 Let's guess.*使學(xué)生能掌握簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)句What's in the bag? Where's the bird? 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

*使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)和鞏固所學(xué)過(guò)的有關(guān)文具及水果方面的單詞 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Kk及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:What's in the bag?

Where 's the bird?

It's on the big K.It's under the small K.交際詞匯:pencil, pen, ruler, bag, apple, pear, banana, boy, girl, teacher 具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師手里拿著一個(gè)盒子,對(duì)大家說(shuō),Look, I've got a box in my hand.Guess, what's in the box ? If your guess is right, I'll give this to you.OK, let's guess what's in the box ?教師讓大家猜的時(shí)候,把It's a...的句型寫(xiě)在黑板上,目的是讓大家反復(fù)運(yùn)用這個(gè)句型。當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)猜到以后,教師就可以把東西送給他/她。接下來(lái),教師再讓大家猜書(shū)包里的東西,還是用同樣的方法。最后,教師再讓學(xué)生猜自己手里、口袋里的東西。通過(guò)這些反復(fù)的猜東西游戲活動(dòng),學(xué)生會(huì)復(fù)習(xí)到許多已學(xué)過(guò)的單詞。

在教師的猜謎語(yǔ)游戲之后,教師讓每個(gè)同學(xué)自己拿一件東西,讓自己的朋友猜,如果能一次猜中的就舉手告訴給教師,教師可以給獎(jiǎng)品。隨后,找一個(gè)同學(xué)拿著自己的東西到前面來(lái)讓大家猜。總之,一開(kāi)始上課教師就要給學(xué)生帶來(lái)一種熱烈的氣氛。接下來(lái),教師帶著大家一起說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱(課文的第3部分)。教學(xué)活動(dòng) See them all.教師將許多文具用品及部分水果放在一個(gè)書(shū)包里,做游戲時(shí),將所有的東西倒在講桌上。然后,馬上用一張報(bào)紙蓋住。這時(shí)教師叫一個(gè)同學(xué),站在東西前面,教師迅速地讓該同學(xué)看一眼,然后讓該生說(shuō)桌子上有什么。如該生說(shuō)了五個(gè)單詞,就在該生所在組的記錄上寫(xiě)上五,然后找另外一個(gè)組的同學(xué)上來(lái)繼續(xù)看東西,最后看哪個(gè)組同學(xué)記得多。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got many things on the desk.I'll ask one pupil from each group to come here and have a look.Then you tell us

what things are on the table.OK?Group One , who wants to come? Good.Now , look!OK, what are they ? 一組之后,教師再叫第二組。課后作業(yè):

Draw five balls and colour each ball with a different colour.用五種不同的顏色畫(huà)五個(gè)不同的球。

unit12 Bounce a ball.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)1~10的數(shù)字 *讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步分清各種顏色

*讓學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用兩個(gè)特殊疑問(wèn)句Who....? Where...? *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ll及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

交際句型:Who can bounce a ball?

I can bounce the ball.Where's the mouse? It's in the boot.交際詞匯:one....ten,catch, here,small, big ,blue, red, yellow, etc.具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿出一個(gè)乒乓球讓大家看看,Look, I've got a ping pang ball.It's small.But I've also got a big ball.Look.This ball is small.(指小球)This ball is small.It's white.This

ball

is big.It's brown.I can bounce the ball.Lokk,one ,two, three.教師拍一會(huì)兒球,停住,Who can come here and bounce a ball? 這時(shí)教師請(qǐng)一個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)拍球,大家一起數(shù)數(shù)。到10的時(shí)候,教師說(shuō),OK, stop, you're very good.Who else can come here and bounce a ball?(教師再叫一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái),重復(fù)一遍,然后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)做下一個(gè)教學(xué)活動(dòng)。)教學(xué)活動(dòng) Throw it and catch it.教師讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái),遞給他們一個(gè)皮球。讓第一個(gè)同學(xué)將球扔給任何一個(gè)同學(xué),扔的時(shí)候要說(shuō),Catch!其他同學(xué)喊Here!Here!凡是扔過(guò)的同學(xué)就自動(dòng)坐下,其余的同學(xué)繼續(xù)扔。直到最后一個(gè)同學(xué)將球傳回給教師。教師可以這樣用英語(yǔ)說(shuō),OK, boys and girls, let's have a ball game.Everybody, stand up ,please.When you throw the ball,you say “Catch”, then you throw the ball to your friend.The others will say,“Here!here!”When you finish, you sit down.Let's see who is the last person.The last person throws the ball back to the teacher again.Understand? OK, let's begin.Catch!教學(xué)活動(dòng)

Draw and hang.教師讓學(xué)生每人畫(huà)一個(gè)球,可大、也可小,并涂上顏色,最后,教師讓大家把所有的球都掛在線繩上,讓大家參觀,并評(píng)出十個(gè)最好的球。課后作業(yè):

Find a pingpong ball and colour it and bring it to the classroom next time.找一個(gè)乒乓球,把它涂上顏色,看誰(shuí)涂得最好看。

unit13 Exercise our body.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)一些鍛煉身體的一般用語(yǔ) *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂基本句子并按照要求做動(dòng)作 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Mm及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂和讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Stand in a row.Bend down.Straighten up.Touch the left foot.更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

Right foot up/ down.What's that over there?

Is it a big mountain?

What are they doing ? They are swimming.Are they happy? Yes, they are.交際詞匯:up, down,front , back, row, line 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Do as the teacher do!本單元的句型比較多,教師要立足于讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂并操練,而不必去講任何的句型。建議:上課的時(shí)候,教師就讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái)。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK,everyone , listen and do as I do.Stand up!Sit down!Now quickly, let's do it again.重復(fù)起立、坐下的目的是讓大家跟著一起迅速做動(dòng)作,不要拖拖拉拉。教師接著說(shuō) Now listen carefully.Stand in a row.Quickly!In a row.Now listen carefully, stand in a line.In a line.Very good.Listen again.Stand in a row.Stand in a line.Very good.Now stand in three lines.Three lines.(手勢(shì))Follow me.Bend down.Straight up.Touch the left foot.Touch the right foot.Right foot up.Right foot down.Left foot down.Hands up!Hands down 在做這些動(dòng)作的時(shí)候,教師要把這些動(dòng)作反復(fù)的做,知道熟練為止。在教師給指令的基礎(chǔ)上,教師鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生跟著老師一邊說(shuō)一邊做。這樣,學(xué)生能說(shuō)這些基本的句子,在大家都知道如何說(shuō)以后,教師讓學(xué)生一起給指令。這時(shí)候,教師獨(dú)自做動(dòng)作,記住,教師做動(dòng)作只是為了檢查學(xué)生是否熟練掌握了這些基本句型。教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Act it in pairs 如果學(xué)生紀(jì)律比較好,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)給指令,做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Listen and do.在做好動(dòng)作的基礎(chǔ)上,讓學(xué)生邊聽(tīng)第2部分的錄音,邊做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Colour it!接著,教師可以讓學(xué)生給50頁(yè)上的兩個(gè)孩子上顏色,在上顏色的時(shí),教師要規(guī)定時(shí)間,一般來(lái)說(shuō)三分鐘就可以了,然后馬上檢查哪位學(xué)生涂得好,進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5

Ask and answer.涂好顏色之后,教師可以拿出字母Mm卡片,把它放在稍遠(yuǎn)的地方,然后教師用兩個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話。教師拿其中一個(gè)說(shuō) what's that over there?Is it a big mountain? 拿著另一個(gè)說(shuō)No, it's letter Mm.教師再重復(fù)一遍,試圖讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂每一句話。然后教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, let's do the dialogue.I ask you a question.You answer my questions.教師在問(wèn)的時(shí)候特別要注意學(xué)生的發(fā)音,在幾次的反復(fù)對(duì)話之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí),并檢查學(xué)生說(shuō)的是否正確。如果不夠熟練就繼續(xù)練習(xí)。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6 Show it to all.接下來(lái),教師拿出自制的小秋千,做成小孩蕩秋千的樣子,然后,叫一個(gè)學(xué)生來(lái)扶著秋千,并做動(dòng)作。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Who wants to come here and help me ? 等學(xué)生上來(lái)后,教師還是拿著兩個(gè)娃娃對(duì)話,What are they doing ? They are swinging.Are they happy? Yes, they are.教師給了幾遍示范之后,直接就可以問(wèn)學(xué)生,讓學(xué)生回答。如果學(xué)生回答時(shí)有發(fā)音等方面的錯(cuò)誤就及時(shí)糾正。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)7 Practice it in pairs 然后,教師再讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行對(duì)話練習(xí),教師進(jìn)行適當(dāng)?shù)某椴椤T趯W(xué)生坐的時(shí)間比較長(zhǎng),需要活動(dòng)的時(shí)候,教師再帶著大家來(lái)進(jìn)行本單元第3部分的內(nèi)容和練習(xí)中第1部分的內(nèi)容。還是采取邊說(shuō)邊做的方法。更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

教學(xué)活動(dòng)8

Listen and read 最后教師讓學(xué)生一起聽(tīng)錄音,朗讀最后的短文。方式是,先讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)一兩遍錄音,然后教師帶讀一兩遍,最后讓學(xué)生自己讀,全班讀。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 1,2,3 of Unit 13 and do the actions with the tape.聽(tīng)13單元第1,2,3部分的朗讀材料,堅(jiān)持邊聽(tīng)邊做動(dòng)作。

unit14 Clap our hands.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生能掌握一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)詞表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)單、復(fù)數(shù)的用法 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)進(jìn)行時(shí)的表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)字母Nn的發(fā)音及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第4部分所給出的句子

交際句型:Pick up the stool.Stand around the tree.Stand up and go to the door.Put down the book and bring back the knife.Who' s under the big N ?

Who's on the small n? 交際詞匯:one......ten, stool, bike , bee, earaser 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Clap our

hands!上課時(shí),教師首先帶著大家拍巴掌,練習(xí)各種節(jié)奏。比如,One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.接下來(lái),教師可以讓學(xué)生拍One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four

five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.教師讓學(xué)生邊拍手邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)數(shù)字。在學(xué)生有了一些熱身活動(dòng)之后,教師可以將學(xué)生帶入本單元的內(nèi)容One, two, pick up the stool.One , two ,three, stand around the tree.One, two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.One, two, three,four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.在說(shuō)這段順口溜的時(shí)候,教師可以通過(guò)動(dòng)作給學(xué)生做解釋?zhuān)部梢宰寣W(xué)生進(jìn)行實(shí)地表演。比如說(shuō),教師和學(xué)生一起說(shuō),One, two, pick up the stool.教師立刻從后面跑到講臺(tái)旁邊把小凳子拿起來(lái),接著大家一起說(shuō),One,two, three, stand around the tree.教師讓幾個(gè)孩子到前面圍一圈,圍在自制的小樹(shù)旁。當(dāng)說(shuō)到One , two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.教師示意讓大家站起來(lái),并朝門(mén)走去。最后說(shuō)到,One, two, three, four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.教師讓學(xué)生把書(shū)放下,并到講臺(tái)前拿一把小刀,然后返回座位。解釋之后,教師要求大家輕輕拍著桌子,按照一定的節(jié)奏說(shuō),也可以先聽(tīng)錄音,然后再一起說(shuō)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Read the words!當(dāng)學(xué)生完成第1部分之后,教師拿出練習(xí)數(shù)字的圖片(第2部分的圖片),教師首先拿出小汽車(chē)圖片,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look , I've got a nice picture.What's this ?(學(xué)生:It's a car)Yes, it's a car.What's 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

this ?(教師指一輛自行車(chē),)等學(xué)生回答后,教師接著問(wèn),How many bikes? 教師用類(lèi)似的方法問(wèn)學(xué)生,直到10張圖片都被問(wèn)到。接著教師拿著圖片讓學(xué)生說(shuō),one car, two bikes, three boys, four girls, five books, six pencils, seven apples, eight bananas, nine bees, ten erasers.在教師帶讀的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生自己讀,兩人一組讀,最后全班讀。當(dāng)大家都比較熟悉的時(shí)候,教師把圖片混插一下,然后抽圖片,讓學(xué)生立刻反應(yīng)它們的英文。總之,以學(xué)生多練為主。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Read and choose 學(xué)生進(jìn)行了大量的口語(yǔ)訓(xùn)練之后,教師讓學(xué)生做一些靜止的活動(dòng)。教師可以對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, please open your books , turn to page 56.Let's do exercise 1.Choose the best answers.You read the first sentence here , and then choose the best answers here.Later we're going to check the answers.We'll see who has got the answers correct.教師說(shuō)這番話時(shí),有些學(xué)生可能聽(tīng)不懂,教師也不必?fù)?dān)心,這些學(xué)生只要看到別人在做什么就知道該怎么做了。但教師要培養(yǎng)孩子的聽(tīng)力能力,不要說(shuō)一句英語(yǔ),再把它翻成漢語(yǔ),這樣,說(shuō)了等于沒(méi)有說(shuō),因?yàn)楹⒆右虼藭?huì)產(chǎn)生依賴(lài)的想法,總盼著教師說(shuō)中文,否則就不去思考。學(xué)生做完之后,教師可以在全班進(jìn)行檢查,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)A,另一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)出正確的答案。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, let's check the answers.Who wants to read A? Who wants to answer? Is it A, B, or C ? Who wants to try?這樣依次檢查。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Ask and answer.學(xué)習(xí)字母時(shí),教師拿出事先準(zhǔn)備好的Nn 字母的大寫(xiě)和小寫(xiě),同時(shí)在大寫(xiě)字母的下方放一個(gè)孩子的圖片。教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who's under the big N? 接著再問(wèn)Who's on the small n ? 在學(xué)生回答問(wèn)題的基礎(chǔ)上,教師給出學(xué)生正確的發(fā)音,Nn,并帶讀幾遍,同時(shí)還說(shuō)A boy is under the big N.A monkey is on the small n.以便讓學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō)。教師隨后讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),最后再檢查說(shuō)的效果(檢查兩三對(duì)同學(xué))。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)的還不夠好,教師應(yīng)糾正,并再給予一點(diǎn)時(shí)間進(jìn)行練習(xí)。等大家都掌握了讀音,教師再拿出字母Nn 的變形圖,用兩個(gè)娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話表演,引出要交流的內(nèi)容。反復(fù)兩遍之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,What are they doing ? Who knows ? Who can answer my question?(在學(xué)生回答上來(lái)之后,教師要給予表?yè)P(yáng))Very good.Now ,everybody.Listen carefully.I'll ask again.He/ She will answer.Listen.(在學(xué)生回答之后,教師轉(zhuǎn)過(guò)來(lái)問(wèn)全班)Yes, what are they doing, everyone ? Good.Look, What's this man doing ? He's....教師有意識(shí)地留給學(xué)生說(shuō)出來(lái),Yes, he's bending his body.Can you bend your body like this ? 在學(xué)生明白意思的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還是讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),然后再抽查效果,最后,教師可以再給一點(diǎn)時(shí)間,讓學(xué)生練習(xí)幾遍。總之,讓每個(gè)學(xué)生在課堂里有充分的說(shuō)話、講英語(yǔ)的時(shí)間。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the first part of Unit 14 and read it

with the tape.Bring your crayons to the classroom next time.聽(tīng)第14單元第1部分的錄音,并模仿朗讀,下次帶彩色蠟筆。

unit15 I can draw it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步掌握有關(guān)水果及有關(guān)動(dòng)作的單詞 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

*使學(xué)生能按照指令畫(huà)出正確的圖案

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Oo及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Draw a big house.Draw a

boy in the house.What are these ? They're Easter eggs.When is the Easter ?

Next week.Who can draw a banana ? I can.Can you draw a window ? No, I can't.交際詞匯:apple , orange, pear, banana, draw, colour , read , sing 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Show it and eat it!上課時(shí),教師首先手里拿著蘋(píng)果對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got something today.What's this ?如果學(xué)生回答,It's

an apple.教師應(yīng)說(shuō),Yes, you're right.It's an apple.Do you like apples?(注意要用復(fù)數(shù)形式)教師應(yīng)問(wèn)幾個(gè)學(xué)生,問(wèn)過(guò)幾個(gè)學(xué)生之后,教師說(shuō),Yes, I like apples, too.Now, I'm going to peel the apple.(邊說(shuō)邊削蘋(píng)果,然后自己吃一塊,表現(xiàn)出很愛(ài)吃的表情,緊接著問(wèn)學(xué)生)Do you like apples? Oh, yes, you like apples, too? OK, now, here you are.教師削一塊蘋(píng)果給學(xué)生吃,并繼續(xù)問(wèn)學(xué)生,并每人削一小塊。吃了一半以后,教師拿著蘋(píng)果和香蕉問(wèn)學(xué)生,Which do you like , apples or bananas ? 這時(shí),學(xué)生肯定要選擇一樣水果說(shuō)出來(lái),教師就可以檢查學(xué)生是否會(huì)說(shuō)。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)喜歡吃香蕉,教師也同樣削一塊香蕉給學(xué)生吃。總之,應(yīng)把要復(fù)習(xí)的水果單詞放在交流中進(jìn)行,同時(shí)可以加上其它的兩種水果,橘子和梨。在學(xué)生吃完,說(shuō)完之后,教師說(shuō),OK,now,please take out your crayons.I want you to draw pictures.Now , look at the first one.A green apple.Quick, draw a green apple here.在學(xué)生畫(huà)畫(huà)的時(shí)候,教師一定要控制時(shí)間。一般來(lái)說(shuō),一張圖只給1分鐘左右就可以了,否則會(huì)影響正常的教學(xué)。其它的圖畫(huà)也是如此。學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要做一個(gè)小小的評(píng)講,對(duì)畫(huà)得認(rèn)真的同學(xué)要進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng),并適當(dāng)給予幾個(gè)人鼓勵(lì),發(fā)個(gè)小貼畫(huà)等。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Move it and say it.教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。在說(shuō)唱的時(shí)候,如果教師把蘋(píng)果、橘子和鴨梨擺在桌上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)就比較容易。比如,先擺好蘋(píng)果,橘子和鴨梨,教師讓學(xué)生說(shuō),apple, orange, pear,然后教師馬上把橘子擺在蘋(píng)果的前面,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),orange,apple,pear,緊接著,教師再拿下橘子換上蘋(píng)果,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),banana,apple, pear.如果教師覺(jué)得這個(gè)比較費(fèi)事,可以將這些圖實(shí)現(xiàn)畫(huà)在一張大紙上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)也可以。在什么教具都沒(méi)有準(zhǔn)備的情況下,教師就用本單元的圖,也可以讓學(xué)生直接看著圖來(lái)說(shuō)。教師做教具的目的是使大家的視線比較集中,注意力比較集中,同時(shí)也給學(xué)生一個(gè)新的視覺(jué)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Guess the fruit.在讓大家說(shuō)水果的時(shí)候,教師也可以用猜的方式來(lái)讓學(xué)生猜是什么水果。教師將一個(gè)水果拿在手里放在講臺(tái)桌后面,讓學(xué)生猜,What's in my hand ? Is it a pear?等。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4

Draw the fruit.教師讓學(xué)生認(rèn)真閱讀教材上所給的句子,按照要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。同樣,在學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要組織講評(píng),評(píng)比,看哪位同學(xué)畫(huà)的好。在學(xué)生畫(huà)完教材上的畫(huà)以后,如果有時(shí)間,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行畫(huà)畫(huà)比賽。讓每組一個(gè)同學(xué)到黑板前,教師給指令,學(xué)生根據(jù)要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。比如,教師說(shuō),Please draw a tree.Draw one ball under the tree and one ball on the tree.Please draw a fish between 更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

the two flowers.Please draw an apple next to the pear.畫(huà)的時(shí)間長(zhǎng)短由老師來(lái)控制。但不宜太長(zhǎng),一般不要超過(guò)5分鐘的時(shí)間,然后轉(zhuǎn)入下一個(gè)活動(dòng)。此練習(xí)可以和本單元練習(xí)2相結(jié)合。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5 Chant it!教師首先拿出Oo字母的圖片,讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)這個(gè)字母的讀音,讀過(guò)幾遍之后,教師可往句子上引導(dǎo),教師可以引導(dǎo)學(xué)生說(shuō),O O O , O O O.Early in the morning, cocks crow.O O O , O O O.Day time again.It's time to go.在學(xué)生反復(fù)練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分組,集體,個(gè)人朗讀。最后比賽看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得好。然后,教師拿出復(fù)活節(jié)的彩蛋。教師只對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Easter Day is a holiday in

America.It's on March 21st.教師可以告訴學(xué)生Easter Day 是復(fù)活節(jié)的意思,Easter egg 是把蛋涂成彩色,或直接用巧克力做成。其余內(nèi)容不必多講。重要的是讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行對(duì)話訓(xùn)練,能起到交流的作用。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6

Listen and tick.教師首先讓學(xué)生看這六張圖,然后依次問(wèn)學(xué)生What's this ? 如碰到有學(xué)生不會(huì)的,教師要多帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生讀幾遍,并且熟悉它們的發(fā)音。然后再讓大家聽(tīng)錄音并判斷是打?qū)€是差。最后教師再?gòu)?qiáng)調(diào)一下house, horse, mouse, mouth的發(fā)音,讓大家注意看口型。課后作業(yè):

Draw three things and write their English word under each picture.任意畫(huà)三種東西,并在下面寫(xiě)上英語(yǔ)。

unit16 I can see it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用I can see......的句型,并能做簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)答 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)有關(guān)動(dòng)物的詞匯

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Pp及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:I

can

see

a dog

What

can you

see?

Can you

see the monkeys?

Yes,I

can.No,I

can't.交際詞匯:rabbit , snake, bird, fish ,mouse, cat, dog, monkey 具體教學(xué)方法:

上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Today we are going to do something.I'm sure you like it.Now ,everybody have a piece of paper.如果教師沒(méi)有帶紙時(shí),則說(shuō),Now ,please take out a piece of

paper, like this.示意給學(xué)生看。Do as I do.Roll ,roll up the paper.Got that ? Let's do it again.Roll ,roll up the paper.這時(shí),教師邊自己卷紙邊讓學(xué)生跟著做,可以反復(fù)多次,并讓學(xué)生練習(xí)說(shuō),同時(shí)還將許多圖片或玩具放在黑板前的左側(cè),自己站在黑板的右側(cè),用卷起的紙筒邊看邊說(shuō)Roll ,roll up the paper。做完第一個(gè)動(dòng)作之后,教師接著示范第二個(gè)動(dòng)作,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),舉起一個(gè)小更多資源:http://www.tmdps.cn/shaojianfang789

狗玩具,這時(shí)教師說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a dog.然后讓該同學(xué)舉起另一個(gè)玩具,這樣以此類(lèi)推。教師示范完之后,讓學(xué)生一起來(lái)認(rèn)讀這些動(dòng)物的名稱(chēng),數(shù)遍之后,教師找學(xué)生拿著紙筒站到教室的后半部,同時(shí)找另一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面為后面的同學(xué)舉圖片或?qū)嵨铮?wèn)后面的學(xué)生,What can you see ?后面的學(xué)生回答說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a eraser.幾分鐘后,教師再讓學(xué)生打開(kāi)書(shū),說(shuō),Now ,please open your books let's read.讀第4部分,教師可以有意識(shí)把這段內(nèi)容變成節(jié)奏型的朗讀材料,用手或腳打著節(jié)奏。之后,教師還可以用兩人一組、全班分組、男女分組的形式進(jìn)行朗讀比賽。教師說(shuō),Now,please read in pairs first(兩人一組)。OK,let's try it together.Boys read , I can see a cat.Girls read , I can see a dog.Let's try it.Very good.Now these three lines read “I can see a cat.”And these three lines read“I can see a dog.”Then, these lines again,and then these lines again.OK, let's try it.當(dāng)大家能很熟練地說(shuō)出這些句子之后,教師說(shuō),Very good.Now let's play a game.Please close your books.Close your eyes.教師讓學(xué)生閉上眼睛之后,馬上把動(dòng)物移開(kāi),桌子上或黑板上只放著或貼著若干個(gè)猴子,并問(wèn)大家,Can you see monkeys ? 重復(fù)幾遍,希望每個(gè)人都能答出Yes, I can.通常,較聰明的孩子預(yù)先看到了該課的句型或已翻書(shū)看過(guò),所以他們能回答教師所提出的問(wèn)題。這時(shí)教師拿出兩只貓的實(shí)物或圖片,讓大家看一眼并迅速藏起來(lái)問(wèn)大家,Can you see the cats ?學(xué)生可能回答No, I can't.這時(shí),教師以此做進(jìn)一步的練習(xí),讓一個(gè)學(xué)生拿個(gè)東西或圖片到前面,讓大家迅速看一眼,并用Can you see the...?的句型問(wèn)大家。最后再回到教材的第5部分,說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱,讓學(xué)生們邊聽(tīng)錄音,邊一起說(shuō),可以不看書(shū)。活動(dòng)之后再進(jìn)行別的教學(xué)活動(dòng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Group competition 教師將全班同學(xué)分成兩個(gè)組,進(jìn)行說(shuō)句子比賽,兩邊的同學(xué)都必須用I can see...的句型說(shuō)句子,一邊說(shuō)一個(gè),輪流進(jìn)行,但一放不能重復(fù)對(duì)方說(shuō)過(guò)的句子。每說(shuō)對(duì)一個(gè)句子,教師就在黑板上給那個(gè)組記一分,但不扣分。最后看哪一個(gè)組的同學(xué)說(shuō)的句子多。教師可以用英語(yǔ)這樣說(shuō),Now, let's have a match.We devide our class into two groups.One is A, the other is B.We'll see which group can say more sentences.For example, I can see a...If you say a correct sentence, I'll write it on the blackboard.But remember you can't repeat what others have said.For example, Zhang Hua says ,''I can see a dog.“You can't say ”I can see a dog, too." Do you understand ? Let's begin.Which group wants to be the first one? 課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 4 and Part 5 of

Unit 16 and read with the tape.聽(tīng)第16單元的第4和第5部分,并跟著朗讀。

第二篇:劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Unit 1 Greetings Unit 2 who is the first Unit 3 Catch and run Unit 4 Color it green Unit 5 Let’s play unit6 Hide and seek unit7 Point to your nose unit8 How many doors? unit9 Tell your friends.unit10 Let's do it.unit11 Let's guess.unit12 Bounce a ball.unit13 Exercise our body.unit14 Clap our hands.unit15 I can draw it.unit16 I can see it.Unit 1 Greetings Teaching aims and demands:

1)can use simple English greet others 2)can say“Good morning!” “Good afternoon “Good evening” 3)Can read the new words about letter A a 4)can speak out the sentences of part 7

二、Important and difficult points: What?s this? It?s the letter Aa.Good morning!Good afternoon!Good evening.Hello!Hi!Slide

三、Teaching Steps : Step1 Greetings:

Good morning /afternoon!Boys and girls how are you today? ……

Ask one student to stand up and say Hello to him or her.and encourage him or her to answer “hello!” Then ask some other students to practice this sentence.Step 2:Call their names and say hello to them.Hello Ming Ming Hello, Dan Dan.Hello Fang Fang …… Step 3: Presentation Show the students some pictures about morning and ask, what?s the picture say?----Morning, Yes, its morning teach the new word.Then show another picture and then teach the word afternoon and the same way to the word evening.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Step 4: After learning the short sentences, we will learn an English song, teach the song and practice in groups or in pairs Step 5: show a model slide(this is a slide, what does it like? Yes, it likes the letter Aa).Write the letter Aa on the blackboard and teach the letter A a A is the slide, Slide on the A a.Step 6 teach the words about the letter A a : ape ace alien then practice some times.Step 7 Teach them how to write letter Aa Step 8 :Do some exercises 1)Do the exercises on page 4 of the students? book 2)match them 3)Good morning Hello!Good night.Good afternoon.Good evening.Good morning.Hello!Good night.Good afternoon!Good evening

Unit 2 who is the first Teaching aims and demands : *They can understand some simple actions and do it;*They can do “Stand up “”Sit down”,” Come here “, “Go back “., * Can understand the meaning of “up “and “”down”.*Can read B b and some new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 5

二、Important and difficult points What?s this? Stand up.Sit down.Come here.Go back Hands pens pencils feet cat snail back bee ball beef

三、teaching method: 本單元的教學(xué)重點(diǎn)是游戲,通過(guò)大家一起做動(dòng)作來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ),也就是我們常說(shuō)的,“玩中學(xué),學(xué)中玩”。教師一到課堂里就可以邊做手勢(shì)邊說(shuō),Now ,stand up ,sit down, Stand up!sit down.說(shuō)的時(shí)候可以先慢后快,也可以讓學(xué)生無(wú)法預(yù)料。大家基本上不出什么錯(cuò)誤的時(shí)候,教師就可以跑到教室的后面叫一個(gè)同學(xué)說(shuō),Come here!Come here!等到學(xué)生來(lái)了之后,教師可以說(shuō)Go back.Go back.Go back.然后再叫另外的同學(xué),在這四個(gè)句子中來(lái)回變換花樣,最好是時(shí)常有所變化。等大家熟悉了以后,、讓大家一起來(lái)說(shuō)順口溜,Up, Up, stand up.Down, down, sit down.Here, here, come here.Back ,back, go back.邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。然后教師開(kāi)始用實(shí)物來(lái)做替換練習(xí)。如,Hands up!Hands down.Hands up, hands down.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Books up.Books down.等等。

當(dāng)大家累了的時(shí)候,就讓大家休息一下,來(lái)給圖畫(huà)著色。著色之后再讓大家相互觀看,看誰(shuí)色彩上的好。接下來(lái)便是教字母的時(shí)間。教師首先讓學(xué)生們看兩個(gè)字母的卡片或形象的圖片(貓和蝸牛)。邊看大寫(xiě)B(tài)的時(shí)候,邊說(shuō)Big B is a cat.然后拿小寫(xiě)b說(shuō),Small b is a snail.The cat and the snail.They are the letter Bb,等.讓大家反復(fù)說(shuō),反復(fù)練習(xí),然后,讓小組的同學(xué)進(jìn)行朗誦比賽,看看哪個(gè)組最好。在學(xué)字母的時(shí)候,注意把這幾個(gè)詞給學(xué)生,讓他們練習(xí)一下。其中還有:bee, ball, beet字母組合等。在適當(dāng)?shù)臅r(shí)候,讓學(xué)生放松一下,可以隨時(shí)讓他們做一些動(dòng)作,即復(fù)習(xí)了所學(xué)內(nèi)容,有有助于學(xué)生上課保持新鮮感,更有興趣參與到學(xué)習(xí)中來(lái)。

請(qǐng)一個(gè)學(xué)生到講臺(tái)上去做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)在下面說(shuō)他做的動(dòng)作,看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得最快最準(zhǔn)確,老師可適當(dāng)給予獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。然后再換其他同學(xué)去,做到充分練習(xí)。四、Exercises : 1.Read and do: Stand up.Sit down.Come here Go back pen up.Pencil down Books up.Feed down…… 2.Let?s chant

A.Up, up, stand up.Down, down,sit down.Here, here, come here.Back, back, go back.Up, up, stand up.Down, down, sit down Up, up, books up.Down down pencils down.Up up pens up, down down feet down.B Good morning, mummy!Good morning, daddy!Good afternoon, teacher!Good evening, my little cat!C.Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pen down!Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pencil down!

Unit 3 Catch and run Teaching aims and demands: *Can understand some simple actions and do it *Know the meaning of “catch、run.”

*Can read and write letter Bb and can read the new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 7 on page 11

二、Important and difficult points: catch!Run to the …… door table window boys girls blackboard teacher flowers cab cap

三、Teaching method and steps: Step1:Bring some toys to the classroom at the beginning of the class, throw them to the classes one by one and say: Catch!If they can understand what?s meaning, take out the pictures show to them and teach the new words: ball, door, window, blackboard, teacher, flowers Step2: Go to the playground play games and learn: Please be ready.Run!

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Group them into boys and girls.Have a rally race.Then queue in a line, do some actions(Who is the fastest): Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Then chant it and do it: Catch a ball, run to the door.Catch a pen, run to Ben.Catch a pencil, run to the middle.Catch, run, catch, run, catch and run.Step3:Go back to the classroom, have a rest, then color it on page 12.then listen and circles on page 12 Step4:take a piece of paper and ask them ?What?s this ?It?s a piece of paper ,yes ,now cut it into a shape of big moon ,and then ask :What?s this now ?---Yes ,it?s moon.What does it look like ike a smiling face , like the letter C c.Who said it likes letter C c ,will be prized.Say: c is the moon, C c is the moon.We are on the moon, we are on the moon.Step5: Show them pictures and teach: cab, cap, and cat.Can add some words about Cc.Step6: Teach them how to write letter Cc.Step7: Exercises: Speak out and do actions: Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Stand!Sit!Catch!Run!Ask and answer in pairs: What?s this? It?s a big C.What?s this? It?s a small c.Practice reading and writing letter C c

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

Unit 4 Color it green

一、Teaching aims and demands:

*can understand and speak out the words about some colors *they can do color the things after the order *使學(xué)生能用兩種問(wèn)句問(wèn)問(wèn)題

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分和練習(xí)1中所給的句子和單詞

二、交際句型:

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Color it green.What color do you like? Which is the blue duck?

三、交際詞匯: pink, green, indigo, red, yellow, purple

四、具體教學(xué)方法:

可以首先拿出一只剪好的白色鴨子對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),This is a duck.This is a duck.I have many ducks.Look, one, two, three, four and five.They are white.Do you know“white”? Now , this is indigo.This is red.教師拿出兩種顏色給學(xué)生看。接著教師用剛才的鴨子舉例,說(shuō),Look here,this is a white duck.This is a indigo duck.Now, look, I have many ducks on the blackboard.What color are they? This is a white duck, this is a indigo duck.從剛才新教的詞匯開(kāi)始,然后再教新的顏色詞,每教一個(gè)新詞之前要復(fù)習(xí)一下剛學(xué)過(guò)的詞,可以將鴨子貼在黑板上,下面再貼上與鴨子顏色一樣的光電紙,然后,教師指著鴨子說(shuō),This is a duck.It's blue.It's a blue duck.然后教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can say the sentences about these ducks?鼓勵(lì)同學(xué)們到前面來(lái)描述。當(dāng)一兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)完之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

接下來(lái),教師選出一些漂亮、鮮艷的顏色,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),I've got lots of colors.What color do you like? 問(wèn)不同的同學(xué),如果該學(xué)生說(shuō),I like green.教師就給該生一個(gè)綠色的小蘋(píng)果(事先剪好不同顏色的蘋(píng)果或其它圖案)

教師教字母D d的時(shí)候,可以直接拿出D字母,然后再拿出帶有豎琴的圖片進(jìn)行比較,同時(shí)帶著大家一起說(shuō),Big D is a harp.Small d is a chair.The girl is sitting on the chair, playing the harp.教師邊說(shuō)邊指著圖片和字母Dd.接著教師說(shuō),Look here.What’s this? It’s a dog.D-dog.What's this? It’s a doll.D-doll.教師帶著大家朗讀D字母音的同時(shí),可以帶出的讀音,并讓學(xué)生看圖片。

在做練習(xí)的時(shí)候,教師引導(dǎo)大家看畫(huà)有彩虹的圖。教師可以說(shuō),Look, we've got a nice rainbow on page 16.This is a rainbow.It has seven colors.Let's see.What color are they? 這時(shí)教師啟發(fā)學(xué)生說(shuō)出這七種顏色。

在做練習(xí)3時(shí),教師先讓大家把圖涂上顏色,然后可以在全班進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)涂色涂的最好。具體操作如下:教師可以讓學(xué)生一行一行地拿著自己的課本到前面來(lái),大家進(jìn)行推薦。最后表彰前十名同學(xué)。

五、課后作業(yè):

一、.Draw five ducks with different colors and write each color next to the duck.辨認(rèn)dog doll door

二、.Read and draw: 1)A cat,2)Flowers

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

3)A cap.4)A dog.三、.Write down the words which have letter “D d”.door cat boy doll duck

blue pink red yellow color

dog green pencil indigo ace

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)Unit 5 Let’s play

一、Teaching aims and demands * 使學(xué)生能正確地做出向右轉(zhuǎn),向左轉(zhuǎn)的動(dòng)作 * 讓學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)出拍手歌歌謠

* 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ee 及所給單詞的讀音 * 使學(xué)生能讀出第四部分所給出的句子

二、交際句型:Turn right Turn left Hold your hands and stand in a circle You have one, I have one.Two little children see a big man.三、交際詞匯: one ,two ,three ,four ,five ,a boy ,four boys ,a girl ,four girls

四、教學(xué)用具:蘋(píng)果,梨,香蕉,帽子的有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨镒帜傅拇笮?xiě)及單詞讀音圖片。

五、具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí),先讓學(xué)生做一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)作,比如,Stand in two lines.Turn right.Turn left.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這些句子的時(shí)候,幫他們完成動(dòng)作,以至于讓他們理解這幾句話的意思然后,集體一起說(shuō)課文的第2部分。當(dāng)學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)這些內(nèi)容以后,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行表演,邊表演邊說(shuō)。這里教師特別要注意全班同學(xué)的整體性,不要讓任何人掉隊(duì)。所以,練習(xí)的遍數(shù)要多,人員要普遍,不要留死角。換句話說(shuō),全班的每一個(gè)人要有充分的練習(xí)時(shí)間。在做這部分的時(shí)候,讓所有的學(xué)生都參與到這個(gè)活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái),在游戲活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái)領(lǐng)略新的知識(shí)。

在學(xué)習(xí)完第1,2部分后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家進(jìn)行單,復(fù)數(shù)概念的練習(xí),由于是初次與學(xué)生見(jiàn)面,所以教師只通過(guò)數(shù)數(shù)的方式,讓學(xué)生知道1~5的含義就可以了,至于說(shuō)a boy , four boys , a girl ,four girls ,也只是讓學(xué)生知道有變化而已。

在學(xué)習(xí)字母E e的時(shí)候,教師首先拿出字母E e卡片,然后再引導(dǎo)學(xué)生看教材的Ee字母的變

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

形圖。同時(shí)帶領(lǐng)大家一起說(shuō),Big E is for sail ,small e is for whale.The ship has a sail, sailing behind the whale.教師說(shuō)此段內(nèi)容時(shí),可以用節(jié)奏的方式說(shuō),并讓學(xué)生拍著節(jié)奏說(shuō)。經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)邊的練習(xí),然后進(jìn)行組與組之間的比賽。

在學(xué)生大聲朗讀之后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家學(xué)習(xí)字母組合的讀音。首先教師強(qiáng)調(diào)的讀音,然后直接以拼音的方式拼出單詞即可。比如,b—e-e=bee ,f—e-e—t=feet等,教師只要帶領(lǐng)拼讀就行了。

六、教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and act 上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK , everyone.Stand up.Sit down.Stand up.Turn right.Turn left.Stand in two lines.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這部分的內(nèi)容的時(shí)候,教師一定要伴隨一定的動(dòng)作,不然學(xué)生不會(huì)理解,也不會(huì)去做動(dòng)作,Hands up , one ,two(拍手)Hands down , one, two(拍手).Hands right, one , two(拍手)Hands left , one two(拍手)。做這個(gè)活動(dòng)時(shí),教師可以先由慢再逐漸加快,特別是說(shuō),hands up ,one ,two 的時(shí)候可以快一些,讓整個(gè)的句子富有節(jié)奏感。教學(xué)活動(dòng) 2 pat-a-cake 教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)此段歌謠的最后方法是兩個(gè)人一組,一邊拍手,一邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)的句子。甚至教師在拍手的空隙間可以加進(jìn)一個(gè)動(dòng)作(比如,高大的人,上學(xué),種樹(shù)等動(dòng)作)。在大家熟練的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還可以讓同學(xué)們之間進(jìn)行比賽,比拍手的協(xié)調(diào)性及英語(yǔ)句字的準(zhǔn)確性等。在用英語(yǔ)教學(xué)時(shí),教師只需簡(jiǎn)單講一下即可。如,now ,everyone , let’s play Pat-a-cake.Do you know? Let `s try it.You have one, I have one, two little children see a big man.Do you understand? Let `s do it in pairs.First you do it after me.Ready? Let `s start.教學(xué)活動(dòng) 3 Color it!

教師上課前復(fù)印好若干張黑白圖片。上課時(shí),讓學(xué)生著色比賽。黑板圖片的選擇可以是自行畫(huà)的,也可以從某教材中復(fù)印下來(lái),但筆畫(huà)不宜太多太難。

七、課后作業(yè)

與爸爸媽媽一起說(shuō)拍手歌。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

unit6 Hide and seek

教學(xué)目的和要求

* 使學(xué)生通過(guò)游戲活動(dòng)培養(yǎng)對(duì)英語(yǔ)的興趣 * 使學(xué)生初步掌握簡(jiǎn)單的指令 * 使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉所學(xué)的顏色 * 使學(xué)生掌握字母及相關(guān)單詞的讀音 交際句型:Show me your book , please.Here you are Quick!Hide your pencil.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

Where is it ? 交際詞匯: Pencil, crayon , eraser ,behind my back , in the desk 教學(xué)用具:鉛筆,橡皮,蠟筆,書(shū),書(shū)包,圖片及實(shí)物 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí)首先拿給學(xué)生們看一件較新鮮的東西。教師說(shuō),Look!I’ve got something in my bag.Ah,here it is.這時(shí)教師拿出一件特殊的玩具,讓學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Let me show you another thing.Look,here it is.Is it good? 學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Look ,let me show you my new pen.This is my pen.It’s new.說(shuō)到此,教師突然問(wèn),Li Ming , have you got a pen ?Show me your pen , please.(講此話時(shí),教師一定要用手勢(shì))Wang Fang, show me your book, please.Thank you.Now, everybody, practice it in pairs.You say ,Show me your pencil , please.’教師邊說(shuō)邊給出節(jié)奏,這樣,學(xué)生就容易上口。

在教本單元時(shí)教師不要太性急,特別是前面的幾部分,教師要一部分一部分地進(jìn)行。比如,教師說(shuō),Now hide your pencil.Quick!Hide your pencil 然后教師去找.Ah ,here.Ah , in the desk.Ah, behind your back 等等。然后,教師再對(duì)大家說(shuō),.Now hide your book!Hide your book.接著教師又開(kāi)始找,然后再說(shuō),Hide your pen.Hide your eraser.等等。

進(jìn)行第二步驟時(shí),教師說(shuō),Who can come here and hide my book?等到學(xué)生藏好以后,教師說(shuō)Where is it? Where is it?邊說(shuō)邊找。

接下來(lái),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, now, let’s play a game ,Who wants to be here?當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)后,教師讓他/她閉上眼睛,或者面對(duì)黑板,然后讓某個(gè)人把東西藏起來(lái).藏好后教師讓這個(gè)學(xué)生問(wèn)OK ,where ’s the pencil ? where’s it? 大家一起說(shuō),There it is!There it is!教師帶領(lǐng)大家做這個(gè)游戲時(shí),應(yīng)該練習(xí)說(shuō)第4部分的內(nèi)容。

大家活動(dòng)了一會(huì)兒后,教師拿出字母卡片,讓大家跟讀發(fā)音,同時(shí)給出幾個(gè)詞,如,(課文中出現(xiàn)的)face ,flag ,foot.并讓大家看跳臺(tái),同時(shí)說(shuō)出該段的順口溜-----Diving-platform, diving-platform ,Ff is the diving-platform, Boys are diving ,girls aye diving ,Ff is the diving-platform.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and point 教師首先不讓同學(xué)們看書(shū),而是問(wèn)大家Where is the door?大家用手指門(mén).Where is the TV? Where is the table? Where is the blackboard? Where is ?? Where are the windows?等等.大家對(duì)這個(gè)句型了解了之后,教師再讓大家打開(kāi)書(shū),聽(tīng)錄音, 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Colour it!教師讓大家準(zhǔn)備好彩色筆,然后將本單元第6部分的圖片上色,但要規(guī)定時(shí)間,教師可這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)Now , everyone ,pleas take out your crayons.let’s colour the pictures on page 22.We ‘ve got eight pictures.You have 3 minutes(教師指表)Let’s see who is the first and whose pictures are the best.Now ,are you ready? Start!教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 LISTEN and circle 在學(xué)習(xí)完了第7部分的內(nèi)容之后,教師可以安排聽(tīng)力內(nèi)容.練習(xí)2的答案是:1(d)2(b)3(c)4 課后作業(yè)

每人回家在紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩,男孩,女孩都可以,并給孩子取個(gè)名字。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

unit7 Point to your nose

教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)人體面部的各個(gè)部位 *使學(xué)生能清楚地辨認(rèn)人體的主要部位

*使學(xué)生初步掌握I have ?This is? There are?的句型 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Gg及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:

What’s this? It’s a nose.What are these ? They’re eyes.Point to your nose.This is my mouth.These are my feet.I have two ears.交際詞匯:Nose, mouth , face, eyes, teeth, feet, hands, legs, arms, hair 教學(xué)用具:教學(xué)圖片(人身體的各個(gè)部位)娃娃兩個(gè)(男女各一個(gè))具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿一個(gè)布娃娃開(kāi)始,教師說(shuō),Look ,I’ve got a beautiful girl.Her name is Mary.She’s 6 years old.Now ,let’s see.This is her face , nose and mouth..These are her eyes, ears and teeth.Now follow me ,face ,nose ,mouth ,eyes ,ears ,teeth.Now ,who wants to come here and show us her face ?Very good.Now you say each part and everybody follows you.(這時(shí)讓全班同學(xué)跟他一起說(shuō)。)重復(fù)類(lèi)似幾遍之后,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, listen and act.Point to your nose.Point to your face ,point to your mouth.point to your eyes.point to your ears.point to your teeth.教師在做此活動(dòng)時(shí),可以采取不同的形式。比如,教師說(shuō),全班同學(xué)一起做;也可以采取同桌的同學(xué)一個(gè)人說(shuō),一個(gè)人做;也可以找一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面給指令,大家一起做。總之,教學(xué)的目的是讓大家盡快熟悉所學(xué)的單詞和句型。

接下來(lái),教師可以組織大家一起玩Simon says的游戲。教師說(shuō),Simon says,Touch your face.touch your nose.Simon says,Touch your ears.等游戲之后,教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)本單元的第3部分。說(shuō)這一部分的時(shí)候,教師要帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起邊說(shuō)邊做,由慢到快,最好還有節(jié)奏。這樣,同學(xué)能夠很快的掌握此段內(nèi)容。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多的情況下,教師可以給出I Have?的句型。教師首先講I have two eyes.I have a nose.I have two ears.I have a mouth.I have many teeth.I have black hair.起初,學(xué)生并不知道have是什么意思,教師只需在黑板上寫(xiě)有,而不需整句話進(jìn)行翻譯。

然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例,I have a face.I have a mouth.I have two ears.I have two eyes等等。教師說(shuō)完之后,馬上找一兩個(gè)同學(xué)復(fù)述,最后再讓全班同學(xué)兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

在個(gè)人和集體練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師再帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起活動(dòng)做練習(xí)5,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Ok, everybody ,let’s do a game.Stand up pleas!Everybody!Follow me.Head ,head, touch your head?(按照課文的內(nèi)容把動(dòng)作做完)如果大家做的好,紀(jì)律也比較好,接著做第4部分的Chant it.這也要求邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。教師要特別注意,學(xué)生不僅要會(huì)做動(dòng)作,更重要的是會(huì)說(shuō)每一句話。所以盡量多練習(xí),反復(fù)練習(xí)。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多,感到比較累的時(shí)候,教師接著進(jìn)行字母教學(xué)。教師可以先示范,拿著字母G g說(shuō),This is G g.Yes, it’s G g(重復(fù)幾遍)。在學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō),逐漸會(huì)了的情況下,教師自然帶出順口溜。Mum is a big G.A baby’s on a small g.Mum and the baby ,they are very happy.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

教學(xué)活動(dòng)1Listen and touch 教師自己可以在一張紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)大兔子。上課時(shí),將兔子的圖掛在黑板上,讓兩個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),聽(tīng)指令,做動(dòng)作,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)動(dòng)作快,動(dòng)作慢的同學(xué)回座位,再換另一個(gè)人。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),look ,I’ve got a big rabbit here.I’ m putting this on the blackboard.I want two pupils to come to the front.I say ‘ear’, they touch the ear.I say `mouth’ ,they touch the mouth, do you understand ?Who wants to come here? Good , Let’s begin.Nose ,… 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Chanting match 教師教完第4部分之后,讓同學(xué)們進(jìn)行說(shuō)唱比賽可以采取男生和女生分開(kāi)的方式,也可以采取一組一組的方式。看看哪個(gè)組說(shuō)得做得最好。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 教師在黑板上畫(huà)一個(gè)沒(méi)有鼻子的孩子,然后,讓學(xué)生上來(lái)給這個(gè)孩子貼鼻子。教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)用紙畫(huà)好,剪好的鼻子。上來(lái)的同學(xué)要離黑板有一定的距離。教師要用布將孩子的眼睛蒙住,然后讓學(xué)生轉(zhuǎn)兩個(gè)圈,再開(kāi)始貼鼻子,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)貼的位置最準(zhǔn)確。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, we’ve got a boy here ,but he has no nose.(手勢(shì))Who can come here and put the nose on his face? 等同學(xué)上來(lái)之后,教師說(shuō)Good, but we have to cover your eyes.You have to turn around twice.Ok., go and stick the nose on the boy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Draw and show 上節(jié)課結(jié)束的時(shí)候,教師給大家留了一個(gè)作業(yè),讓每個(gè)人回家畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩。這一次,教師利用上課的機(jī)會(huì)進(jìn)行點(diǎn)評(píng)。首先,教師在黑板前拴上一個(gè)線繩,然后讓孩子把圖片用曲別針掛在線繩上,最后讓全班同學(xué)進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看看哪個(gè)同學(xué)畫(huà)的最好。然后,教師給予一定獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。通常獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)的人數(shù)應(yīng)盡量達(dá)到四分之一,這樣,孩子感到稍加努力,都能得到獎(jiǎng)品。課后作業(yè):

Draw an animal of any kind and write down its nose ,mouth, ears ,teeth ,etc.(在一張紙上畫(huà)任何一種動(dòng)物,并用英語(yǔ)寫(xiě)上那兒是鼻子,嘴。耳朵,牙齒等。)

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)

unit8 How many doors?

1使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉1`5的數(shù)字 2 使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)6~10的數(shù)字 3 使學(xué)生加深對(duì)單`復(fù)數(shù)的概念 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母及所給單詞的讀音 5 使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型: How many doors? It’s a book.This is Hh.It’s letter H h

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

交際詞匯: One?ten, orange ,pear, apple, banana ,door, window , chair, TV ,book , pen ,pencile 教學(xué)用具:1~10的單詞卡,有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨铮〔伎诖瑥椙蛉舾蓚€(gè)。小獎(jiǎng)品,字母的大小寫(xiě)及掛圖的圖片。具體教學(xué)方式:

首先教師拿1~10的數(shù)字讓學(xué)生看,同時(shí)教師用英語(yǔ)發(fā)每個(gè)數(shù)字的讀音,然后教師讓大家跟著一起說(shuō)這些數(shù)子。教師也可以拿一些書(shū)本來(lái)數(shù),邊數(shù)邊說(shuō)。講復(fù)數(shù)概念的時(shí)候,教師只需先拿起一本書(shū),說(shuō)a book,然后再拿起一本書(shū),把兩本書(shū)放在一起時(shí)說(shuō),two books教師特別要強(qiáng)調(diào)的發(fā)音,以便引起學(xué)生的注意。然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例說(shuō)a desk, two desks ,a table,two tables ,a door, two doors, a pen ,two pens, a pencil, two pencils等。教師舉例之后,馬上讓學(xué)生來(lái)說(shuō),教師說(shuō)第一部分,讓學(xué)生說(shuō)第2部分。比如,教師說(shuō)a book,并馬上把兩本書(shū)放在一起,示意大家說(shuō),two books,?大家熟悉了復(fù)數(shù)的概念時(shí),教師就可以引入課文中的內(nèi)容。,比如one orange ,two pears, three apples ,four bananas如果有實(shí)物或圖,就用實(shí)物或圖來(lái)說(shuō)明。最后帶著大家一起認(rèn)讀。

接著,教師可以采取的教學(xué)活動(dòng)進(jìn)一步帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生辨認(rèn)這些詞。教師說(shuō)一個(gè)詞,讓學(xué)生迅速用手指出來(lái)。比如,學(xué)生馬上就指,教師的語(yǔ)速也可以由慢到快。

其次,教師帶領(lǐng)大家一起做第2部分練習(xí)。首先,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組自己做。教師這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)學(xué)生做了一會(huì)兒以后,教師說(shuō),如果大家回答的很順利,教師讓大家看第4部分。還是先兩人一組練習(xí),然后,一組一組的進(jìn)行對(duì)話問(wèn)答。

本單元第5 部分是讓學(xué)生自己畫(huà)畫(huà),教師應(yīng)該給學(xué)生規(guī)定時(shí)間,看那個(gè)同學(xué)在最短的時(shí)間內(nèi)畫(huà)出最好的的香蕉和蘋(píng)果。注意,教師進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)時(shí),應(yīng)只表?yè)P(yáng)畫(huà)一個(gè)蘋(píng)果和一個(gè)香蕉的同學(xué),同時(shí)要提醒畫(huà)的多的同學(xué)認(rèn)真看文字要求

本單元第7 部分是學(xué)習(xí)字母部分,教師可以先讓同學(xué)們看掛圖,讓大家猜掛圖畫(huà)的是什么,如果大家說(shuō)出是樹(shù)和房子時(shí),教師拿出字母卡,讓大家進(jìn)行比較,順便引出順口溜。教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)小布袋,里面裝有一些玻璃球。

兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)unit9 Tell your friends.*使學(xué)生能向別人做簡(jiǎn)單的自我介紹 *使學(xué)生初步學(xué)會(huì)使用I’m的句型

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ii及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第5部分所給出的句子 交際句型:I'm Dongdong.I'm six.I'm a

boy.I like toy cars.交際詞匯:boy ,toy, car, girl , doll 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師首先用一個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做自我介紹,教師可以藏在布娃娃的后面,模仿小娃娃的的員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

說(shuō)話聲,說(shuō),Hello, My name is Mary.I'm Mary.I'm six.I'm a

girl.I like dolls.當(dāng)說(shuō)到dolls的時(shí)候,教師應(yīng)拿起兩個(gè)其他的布娃娃,放在該娃娃的手里。然后,教師再重復(fù)一遍。說(shuō)完之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can come here and say like this ?教師找一個(gè)或兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)之后,讓大家再聽(tīng)第二段。Very good,now,listen to me.I have another friend.His name is Tom.說(shuō)到此教師拿起第二個(gè)娃娃,說(shuō),Hello, I'm Tom.I'm seven.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.說(shuō)完之后,教師重復(fù)一遍。然后,繼續(xù)讓兩三個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái)說(shuō)這個(gè)Tom。在大家都知道內(nèi)容的情況下,教師對(duì)同學(xué)說(shuō),Now you know my friends already.Who can come here and talk about yourself.Who wants to try?You can say, I'm ***教師舉班上一個(gè)人名為例,I'm 7.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.Who wants to try? Very good.Come here!等兩三個(gè)學(xué)生結(jié)束后,教師對(duì)全班說(shuō),now, practise it in pairs.在學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分別向五個(gè)學(xué)生介紹自己,并且加上Hello,Good morning.I'm...最后再說(shuō),Goodbye!這樣通過(guò)大量的練習(xí),使學(xué)生能在課堂就掌握這句型。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Unit 10 three times.unit10 Let's do it.*使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂用英語(yǔ)說(shuō)的簡(jiǎn)單指令 *使學(xué)生能進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)文具用品

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Jj及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Put the ruler in your

hand.This is a ruler.That is a crayon.交際詞匯:book, pencil-box,crayon, ruler, window, door, boy, girl.具體教學(xué)方式:

在前面的幾個(gè)單元中,我們都先后學(xué)習(xí)了一些文具用品的單詞,但本單元的重點(diǎn)在于復(fù)習(xí)這些文具用品的單詞,并能了解一些介詞的基本位置,如,in , on ,under ,between及next to,并圍繞介詞來(lái)開(kāi)展一些活動(dòng)。上課開(kāi)始時(shí),教師可以拿著已經(jīng)熟悉的文具問(wèn)學(xué)生們,What's this ?What's

that?當(dāng)學(xué)生熟悉這些單詞后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起做動(dòng)作。教師說(shuō),Put the book on your hand.讓大家馬上做動(dòng)作,然后,教師接著說(shuō),Put the ruler in your hand.Put the book under your chair.除了這三句話以外,教師還可以說(shuō),Put your book in your bag.Put the pencil in your pencil-box.Put the book between the two pencils.Put the crayon

next to the book.等

教師做這些動(dòng)作時(shí),讓學(xué)生跟著一起模仿,而不要一上課就給學(xué)生解釋什么是介詞。

做完一遍動(dòng)作后,教師還可以繼續(xù)用別的句子來(lái)鞏固剛才所練習(xí)的內(nèi)容,比如,Put the pen on your desk.Put the

book in your hand.等。然后教師用一個(gè)乒乓球和一個(gè)粉筆盒給學(xué)生單個(gè)示范,The ball is on the box.The ball is in the box.The ball is under the box.The ball is between the two boxes.The ball is next to the box.Put the ball behind the box.在教師解釋的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓每個(gè)人都拿著一支鉛筆跟老師一起說(shuō)、一起做。

經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)遍的練習(xí)后,教師要讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行描述,最后選幾個(gè)人在全班進(jìn)行描述。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

此外,還可以進(jìn)行其它教學(xué)活動(dòng)。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the chant in the next Unit and say it with the tape.預(yù)習(xí)下單元中的說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。

unit11 Let's guess.*使學(xué)生能掌握簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)句What's in the bag? Where's the bird? *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)和鞏固所學(xué)過(guò)的有關(guān)文具及水果方面的單詞 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Kk及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:What's in the bag?

Where 's the bird?

It's on the big K.It's under the small K.交際詞匯:pencil, pen, ruler, bag, apple, pear, banana, boy, girl, teacher 具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師手里拿著一個(gè)盒子,對(duì)大家說(shuō),Look, I've got a box in my hand.Guess, what's in the box ? If your guess is right, I'll give this to you.OK, let's guess what's in the box ?教師讓大家猜的時(shí)候,把It's a...的句型寫(xiě)在黑板上,目的是讓大家反復(fù)運(yùn)用這個(gè)句型。當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)猜到以后,教師就可以把東西送給他/她。接下來(lái),教師再讓大家猜書(shū)包里的東西,還是用同樣的方法。最后,教師再讓學(xué)生猜自己手里、口袋里的東西。通過(guò)這些反復(fù)的猜東西游戲活動(dòng),學(xué)生會(huì)復(fù)習(xí)到許多已學(xué)過(guò)的單詞。

在教師的猜謎語(yǔ)游戲之后,教師讓每個(gè)同學(xué)自己拿一件東西,讓自己的朋友猜,如果能一次猜中的就舉手告訴給教師,教師可以給獎(jiǎng)品。隨后,找一個(gè)同學(xué)拿著自己的東西到前面來(lái)讓大家猜。總之,一開(kāi)始上課教師就要給學(xué)生帶來(lái)一種熱烈的氣氛。接下來(lái),教師帶著大家一起說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱(課文的第3部分)。教學(xué)活動(dòng) See them all.教師將許多文具用品及部分水果放在一個(gè)書(shū)包里,做游戲時(shí),將所有的東西倒在講桌上。然后,馬上用一張報(bào)紙蓋住。這時(shí)教師叫一個(gè)同學(xué),站在東西前面,教師迅速地讓該同學(xué)看一眼,然后讓該生說(shuō)桌子上有什么。如該生說(shuō)了五個(gè)單詞,就在該生所在組的記錄上寫(xiě)上五,然后找另外一個(gè)組的同學(xué)上來(lái)繼續(xù)看東西,最后看哪個(gè)組同學(xué)記得多。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got many things on the desk.I'll ask one pupil from each group to come here and have a look.Then you tell us

what things are on the table.OK?Group One , who wants to come? Good.Now , look!OK, what are they ? 一組之后,教師再叫第二組。課后作業(yè):

Draw five balls and colour each ball with a different colour.用五種不同的顏色畫(huà)五個(gè)不同的球。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

unit12 Bounce a ball.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)1~10的數(shù)字 *讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步分清各種顏色

*讓學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用兩個(gè)特殊疑問(wèn)句Who....? Where...? *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ll及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Who can bounce a ball?

I can bounce the ball.Where's the mouse? It's in the boot.交際詞匯:one....ten,catch, here,small, big ,blue, red, yellow, etc.具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿出一個(gè)乒乓球讓大家看看,Look, I've got a ping pang ball.It's small.But I've also got a big ball.Look.This ball is small.(指小球)This ball is small.It's white.This

ball

is big.It's brown.I can bounce the ball.Lokk,one ,two, three.教師拍一會(huì)兒球,停住,Who can come here and bounce a ball? 這時(shí)教師請(qǐng)一個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)拍球,大家一起數(shù)數(shù)。到10的時(shí)候,教師說(shuō),OK, stop, you're very good.Who else can come here and bounce a ball?(教師再叫一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái),重復(fù)一遍,然后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)做下一個(gè)教學(xué)活動(dòng)。)教學(xué)活動(dòng) Throw it and catch it.教師讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái),遞給他們一個(gè)皮球。讓第一個(gè)同學(xué)將球扔給任何一個(gè)同學(xué),扔的時(shí)候要說(shuō),Catch!其他同學(xué)喊Here!Here!凡是扔過(guò)的同學(xué)就自動(dòng)坐下,其余的同學(xué)繼續(xù)扔。直到最后一個(gè)同學(xué)將球傳回給教師。教師可以這樣用英語(yǔ)說(shuō),OK, boys and girls, let's have a ball game.Everybody, stand up ,please.When you throw the ball,you say “Catch”, then you throw the ball to your friend.The others will say,“Here!here!”When you finish, you sit down.Let's see who is the last person.The last person throws the ball back to the teacher again.Understand? OK, let's begin.Catch!教學(xué)活動(dòng)

Draw and hang.教師讓學(xué)生每人畫(huà)一個(gè)球,可大、也可小,并涂上顏色,最后,教師讓大家把所有的球都掛在線繩上,讓大家參觀,并評(píng)出十個(gè)最好的球。課后作業(yè):

Find a pingpong ball and colour it and bring it to the classroom next time.找一個(gè)乒乓球,把它涂上顏色,看誰(shuí)涂得最好看。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

unit13 Exercise our body.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)一些鍛煉身體的一般用語(yǔ) *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂基本句子并按照要求做動(dòng)作 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Mm及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂和讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Stand in a row.Bend down.Straighten up.Touch the left foot.Right foot up/ down.What's that over there?

Is it a big mountain?

What are they doing ? They are swimming.Are they happy? Yes, they are.交際詞匯:up, down,front , back, row, line 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Do as the teacher do!本單元的句型比較多,教師要立足于讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂并操練,而不必去講任何的句型。建議:上課的時(shí)候,教師就讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái)。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK,everyone , listen and do as I do.Stand up!Sit down!Now quickly, let's do it again.重復(fù)起立、坐下的目的是讓大家跟著一起迅速做動(dòng)作,不要拖拖拉拉。教師接著說(shuō) Now listen carefully.Stand in a row.Quickly!In a row.Now listen carefully, stand in a line.In a line.Very good.Listen again.Stand in a row.Stand in a line.Very good.Now stand in three lines.Three lines.(手勢(shì))Follow me.Bend down.Straight up.Touch the left foot.Touch the right foot.Right foot up.Right foot down.Left foot down.Hands up!Hands down 在做這些動(dòng)作的時(shí)候,教師要把這些動(dòng)作反復(fù)的做,知道熟練為止。在教師給指令的基礎(chǔ)上,教師鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生跟著老師一邊說(shuō)一邊做。這樣,學(xué)生能說(shuō)這些基本的句子,在大家都知道如何說(shuō)以后,教師讓學(xué)生一起給指令。這時(shí)候,教師獨(dú)自做動(dòng)作,記住,教師做動(dòng)作只是為了檢查學(xué)生是否熟練掌握了這些基本句型。教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Act it in pairs 如果學(xué)生紀(jì)律比較好,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)給指令,做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Listen and do.在做好動(dòng)作的基礎(chǔ)上,讓學(xué)生邊聽(tīng)第2部分的錄音,邊做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Colour it!接著,教師可以讓學(xué)生給50頁(yè)上的兩個(gè)孩子上顏色,在上顏色的時(shí),教師要規(guī)定時(shí)間,一般來(lái)說(shuō)三分鐘就可以了,然后馬上檢查哪位學(xué)生涂得好,進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5

Ask and answer.涂好顏色之后,教師可以拿出字母Mm卡片,把它放在稍遠(yuǎn)的地方,然后教師用兩個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話。教師拿其中一個(gè)說(shuō) what's that over there?Is it a big mountain? 拿著另一個(gè)說(shuō)No, it's letter Mm.教師再重復(fù)一遍,試圖讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂每一句話。然后教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, let's do the dialogue.I ask you a question.You answer my questions.教師在問(wèn)的時(shí)候特別要注意學(xué)生的發(fā)音,員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

在幾次的反復(fù)對(duì)話之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí),并檢查學(xué)生說(shuō)的是否正確。如果不夠熟練就繼續(xù)練習(xí)。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6 Show it to all.接下來(lái),教師拿出自制的小秋千,做成小孩蕩秋千的樣子,然后,叫一個(gè)學(xué)生來(lái)扶著秋千,并做動(dòng)作。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Who wants to come here and help me ? 等學(xué)生上來(lái)后,教師還是拿著兩個(gè)娃娃對(duì)話,What are they doing ? They are swinging.Are they happy? Yes, they are.教師給了幾遍示范之后,直接就可以問(wèn)學(xué)生,讓學(xué)生回答。如果學(xué)生回答時(shí)有發(fā)音等方面的錯(cuò)誤就及時(shí)糾正。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)7 Practice it in pairs 然后,教師再讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行對(duì)話練習(xí),教師進(jìn)行適當(dāng)?shù)某椴椤T趯W(xué)生坐的時(shí)間比較長(zhǎng),需要活動(dòng)的時(shí)候,教師再帶著大家來(lái)進(jìn)行本單元第3部分的內(nèi)容和練習(xí)中第1部分的內(nèi)容。還是采取邊說(shuō)邊做的方法。教學(xué)活動(dòng)8

Listen and read 最后教師讓學(xué)生一起聽(tīng)錄音,朗讀最后的短文。方式是,先讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)一兩遍錄音,然后教師帶讀一兩遍,最后讓學(xué)生自己讀,全班讀。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 1,2,3 of Unit 13 and do the actions with the tape.聽(tīng)13單元第1,2,3部分的朗讀材料,堅(jiān)持邊聽(tīng)邊做動(dòng)作。

unit14 Clap our hands.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生能掌握一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)詞表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)單、復(fù)數(shù)的用法 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)進(jìn)行時(shí)的表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)字母Nn的發(fā)音及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第4部分所給出的句子

交際句型:Pick up the stool.Stand around the tree.Stand up and go to the door.Put down the book and bring back the knife.Who' s under the big N ?

Who's on the small n? 交際詞匯:one......ten, stool, bike , bee, earaser 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Clap our

hands!上課時(shí),教師首先帶著大家拍巴掌,練習(xí)各種節(jié)奏。比如,One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.接下來(lái),教師可以讓學(xué)生拍One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four

five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.教師讓學(xué)生邊拍手邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)數(shù)字。在學(xué)生有了一些熱身活動(dòng)之后,教師可以將

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

學(xué)生帶入本單元的內(nèi)容One, two, pick up the stool.One , two ,three, stand around the tree.One, two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.One, two, three,four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.在說(shuō)這段順口溜的時(shí)候,教師可以通過(guò)動(dòng)作給學(xué)生做解釋?zhuān)部梢宰寣W(xué)生進(jìn)行實(shí)地表演。比如說(shuō),教師和學(xué)生一起說(shuō),One, two, pick up the stool.教師立刻從后面跑到講臺(tái)旁邊把小凳子拿起來(lái),接著大家一起說(shuō),One,two, three, stand around the tree.教師讓幾個(gè)孩子到前面圍一圈,圍在自制的小樹(shù)旁。當(dāng)說(shuō)到One , two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.教師示意讓大家站起來(lái),并朝門(mén)走去。最后說(shuō)到,One, two, three, four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.教師讓學(xué)生把書(shū)放下,并到講臺(tái)前拿一把小刀,然后返回座位。解釋之后,教師要求大家輕輕拍著桌子,按照一定的節(jié)奏說(shuō),也可以先聽(tīng)錄音,然后再一起說(shuō)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Read the words!當(dāng)學(xué)生完成第1部分之后,教師拿出練習(xí)數(shù)字的圖片(第2部分的圖片),教師首先拿出小汽車(chē)圖片,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look , I've got a nice picture.What's this ?(學(xué)生:It's a car)Yes, it's a car.What's this ?(教師指一輛自行車(chē),)等學(xué)生回答后,教師接著問(wèn),How many bikes? 教師用類(lèi)似的方法問(wèn)學(xué)生,直到10張圖片都被問(wèn)到。接著教師拿著圖片讓學(xué)生說(shuō),one car, two bikes, three boys, four girls, five books, six pencils, seven apples, eight bananas, nine bees, ten erasers.在教師帶讀的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生自己讀,兩人一組讀,最后全班讀。當(dāng)大家都比較熟悉的時(shí)候,教師把圖片混插一下,然后抽圖片,讓學(xué)生立刻反應(yīng)它們的英文。總之,以學(xué)生多練為主。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Read and choose 學(xué)生進(jìn)行了大量的口語(yǔ)訓(xùn)練之后,教師讓學(xué)生做一些靜止的活動(dòng)。教師可以對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, please open your books , turn to page 56.Let's do exercise 1.Choose the best answers.You read the first sentence here , and then choose the best answers here.Later we're going to check the answers.We'll see who has got the answers correct.教師說(shuō)這番話時(shí),有些學(xué)生可能聽(tīng)不懂,教師也不必?fù)?dān)心,這些學(xué)生只要看到別人在做什么就知道該怎么做了。但教師要培養(yǎng)孩子的聽(tīng)力能力,不要說(shuō)一句英語(yǔ),再把它翻成漢語(yǔ),這樣,說(shuō)了等于沒(méi)有說(shuō),因?yàn)楹⒆右虼藭?huì)產(chǎn)生依賴(lài)的想法,總盼著教師說(shuō)中文,否則就不去思考。學(xué)生做完之后,教師可以在全班進(jìn)行檢查,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)A,另一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)出正確的答案。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, let's check the answers.Who wants to read A? Who wants to answer? Is it A, B, or C ? Who wants to try?這樣依次檢查。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Ask and answer.學(xué)習(xí)字母時(shí),教師拿出事先準(zhǔn)備好的Nn 字母的大寫(xiě)和小寫(xiě),同時(shí)在大寫(xiě)字母的下方放一個(gè)孩子的圖片。教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who's under the big N? 接著再問(wèn)Who's on the small n ? 在學(xué)生回答問(wèn)題的基礎(chǔ)上,教師給出學(xué)生正確的發(fā)音,Nn,并帶讀幾遍,同時(shí)還說(shuō)A boy is under the big N.A monkey is on the small n.以便讓學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō)。教師隨后讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),最后再檢查說(shuō)的效果(檢查兩三對(duì)同學(xué))。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)的還不夠好,教師應(yīng)糾正,并再給予一點(diǎn)時(shí)間進(jìn)行練習(xí)。等大家都掌握了讀音,教師再拿出字母Nn 的變形圖,用兩個(gè)娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話表演,引出要交流的內(nèi)容。反復(fù)兩遍之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,What are they doing ? Who knows ? Who can answer my question?(在學(xué)生回答上來(lái)之后,教師要給予表?yè)P(yáng))Very good.Now ,everybody.Listen carefully.I'll ask again.He/ She will answer.Listen.(在學(xué)生回答之后,教師轉(zhuǎn)過(guò)來(lái)問(wèn)全班)Yes, what are they doing, everyone ? Good.Look, What's this man doing ? He's....教師有意識(shí)地留給學(xué)生說(shuō)出來(lái),Yes, he's bending his body.Can you bend your body like this ? 在學(xué)生明白意思的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還是讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),然后再抽查效果,最后,教師可以再給一點(diǎn)時(shí)間,讓學(xué)生練習(xí)幾遍。總之,讓每個(gè)學(xué)生在課堂里有充分的說(shuō)話、講英語(yǔ)的時(shí)間。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the first part of Unit 14 and read it

with the tape.Bring your crayons to the classroom

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

next time.聽(tīng)第14單元第1部分的錄音,并模仿朗讀,下次帶彩色蠟筆。

unit15 I can draw it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步掌握有關(guān)水果及有關(guān)動(dòng)作的單詞 *使學(xué)生能按照指令畫(huà)出正確的圖案

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Oo及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Draw a big house.Draw a

boy in the house.What are these ? They're Easter eggs.When is the Easter ?

Next week.Who can draw a banana ? I can.Can you draw a window ? No, I can't.交際詞匯:apple , orange, pear, banana, draw, colour , read , sing 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Show it and eat it!上課時(shí),教師首先手里拿著蘋(píng)果對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got something today.What's this ?如果學(xué)生回答,It's

an apple.教師應(yīng)說(shuō),Yes, you're right.It's an apple.Do you like apples?(注意要用復(fù)數(shù)形式)教師應(yīng)問(wèn)幾個(gè)學(xué)生,問(wèn)過(guò)幾個(gè)學(xué)生之后,教師說(shuō),Yes, I like apples, too.Now, I'm going to peel the apple.(邊說(shuō)邊削蘋(píng)果,然后自己吃一塊,表現(xiàn)出很愛(ài)吃的表情,緊接著問(wèn)學(xué)生)Do you like apples? Oh, yes, you like apples, too? OK, now, here you are.教師削一塊蘋(píng)果給學(xué)生吃,并繼續(xù)問(wèn)學(xué)生,并每人削一小塊。吃了一半以后,教師拿著蘋(píng)果和香蕉問(wèn)學(xué)生,Which do you like , apples or bananas ? 這時(shí),學(xué)生肯定要選擇一樣水果說(shuō)出來(lái),教師就可以檢查學(xué)生是否會(huì)說(shuō)。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)喜歡吃香蕉,教師也同樣削一塊香蕉給學(xué)生吃。總之,應(yīng)把要復(fù)習(xí)的水果單詞放在交流中進(jìn)行,同時(shí)可以加上其它的兩種水果,橘子和梨。在學(xué)生吃完,說(shuō)完之后,教師說(shuō),OK,now,please take out your crayons.I want you to draw pictures.Now , look at the first one.A green apple.Quick, draw a green apple here.在學(xué)生畫(huà)畫(huà)的時(shí)候,教師一定要控制時(shí)間。一般來(lái)說(shuō),一張圖只給1分鐘左右就可以了,否則會(huì)影響正常的教學(xué)。其它的圖畫(huà)也是如此。學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要做一個(gè)小小的評(píng)講,對(duì)畫(huà)得認(rèn)真的同學(xué)要進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng),并適當(dāng)給予幾個(gè)人鼓勵(lì),發(fā)個(gè)小貼畫(huà)等。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Move it and say it.教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。在說(shuō)唱的時(shí)候,如果教師把蘋(píng)果、橘子和鴨梨擺在桌上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)就比較容易。比如,先擺好蘋(píng)果,橘子和鴨梨,教師讓學(xué)生說(shuō),apple, orange, pear,然后教師馬上把橘子擺在蘋(píng)果的前面,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),orange,apple,pear,緊接著,教師再拿下橘子換上蘋(píng)果,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),banana,apple, pear.如果教師覺(jué)得這個(gè)比較費(fèi)事,可以將這些圖實(shí)現(xiàn)畫(huà)在員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

一張大紙上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)也可以。在什么教具都沒(méi)有準(zhǔn)備的情況下,教師就用本單元的圖,也可以讓學(xué)生直接看著圖來(lái)說(shuō)。教師做教具的目的是使大家的視線比較集中,注意力比較集中,同時(shí)也給學(xué)生一個(gè)新的視覺(jué)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Guess the fruit.在讓大家說(shuō)水果的時(shí)候,教師也可以用猜的方式來(lái)讓學(xué)生猜是什么水果。教師將一個(gè)水果拿在手里放在講臺(tái)桌后面,讓學(xué)生猜,What's in my hand ? Is it a pear?等。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4

Draw the fruit.教師讓學(xué)生認(rèn)真閱讀教材上所給的句子,按照要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。同樣,在學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要組織講評(píng),評(píng)比,看哪位同學(xué)畫(huà)的好。在學(xué)生畫(huà)完教材上的畫(huà)以后,如果有時(shí)間,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行畫(huà)畫(huà)比賽。讓每組一個(gè)同學(xué)到黑板前,教師給指令,學(xué)生根據(jù)要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。比如,教師說(shuō),Please draw a tree.Draw one ball under the tree and one ball on the tree.Please draw a fish between the two flowers.Please draw an apple next to the pear.畫(huà)的時(shí)間長(zhǎng)短由老師來(lái)控制。但不宜太長(zhǎng),一般不要超過(guò)5分鐘的時(shí)間,然后轉(zhuǎn)入下一個(gè)活動(dòng)。此練習(xí)可以和本單元練習(xí)2相結(jié)合。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5 Chant it!教師首先拿出Oo字母的圖片,讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)這個(gè)字母的讀音,讀過(guò)幾遍之后,教師可往句子上引導(dǎo),教師可以引導(dǎo)學(xué)生說(shuō),O O O , O O O.Early in the morning, cocks crow.O O O , O O O.Day time again.It's time to go.在學(xué)生反復(fù)練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分組,集體,個(gè)人朗讀。最后比賽看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得好。然后,教師拿出復(fù)活節(jié)的彩蛋。教師只對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Easter Day is a holiday in

America.It's on March 21st.教師可以告訴學(xué)生Easter Day 是復(fù)活節(jié)的意思,Easter egg 是把蛋涂成彩色,或直接用巧克力做成。其余內(nèi)容不必多講。重要的是讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行對(duì)話訓(xùn)練,能起到交流的作用。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6

Listen and tick.教師首先讓學(xué)生看這六張圖,然后依次問(wèn)學(xué)生What's this ? 如碰到有學(xué)生不會(huì)的,教師要多帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生讀幾遍,并且熟悉它們的發(fā)音。然后再讓大家聽(tīng)錄音并判斷是打?qū)€是差。最后教師再?gòu)?qiáng)調(diào)一下house, horse, mouse, mouth的發(fā)音,讓大家注意看口型。課后作業(yè):

Draw three things and write their English word under each picture.任意畫(huà)三種東西,并在下面寫(xiě)上英語(yǔ)。

unit16 I can see it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用I can see......的句型,并能做簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)答 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)有關(guān)動(dòng)物的詞匯

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Pp及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

交際句型:I

can

see

a dog

What

can you

see?

Can you

see the monkeys?

Yes,I

can.No,I

can't.交際詞匯:rabbit , snake, bird, fish ,mouse, cat, dog, monkey 具體教學(xué)方法:

上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Today we are going to do something.I'm sure you like it.Now ,everybody have a piece of paper.如果教師沒(méi)有帶紙時(shí),則說(shuō),Now ,please take out a piece of

paper, like this.示意給學(xué)生看。Do as I do.Roll ,roll up the paper.Got that ? Let's do it again.Roll ,roll up the paper.這時(shí),教師邊自己卷紙邊讓學(xué)生跟著做,可以反復(fù)多次,并讓學(xué)生練習(xí)說(shuō),同時(shí)還將許多圖片或玩具放在黑板前的左側(cè),自己站在黑板的右側(cè),用卷起的紙筒邊看邊說(shuō)Roll ,roll up the paper。做完第一個(gè)動(dòng)作之后,教師接著示范第二個(gè)動(dòng)作,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),舉起一個(gè)小狗玩具,這時(shí)教師說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a dog.然后讓該同學(xué)舉起另一個(gè)玩具,這樣以此類(lèi)推。教師示范完之后,讓學(xué)生一起來(lái)認(rèn)讀這些動(dòng)物的名稱(chēng),數(shù)遍之后,教師找學(xué)生拿著紙筒站到教室的后半部,同時(shí)找另一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面為后面的同學(xué)舉圖片或?qū)嵨铮?wèn)后面的學(xué)生,What can you see ?后面的學(xué)生回答說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a eraser.幾分鐘后,教師再讓學(xué)生打開(kāi)書(shū),說(shuō),Now ,please open your books let's read.讀第4部分,教師可以有意識(shí)把這段內(nèi)容變成節(jié)奏型的朗讀材料,用手或腳打著節(jié)奏。之后,教師還可以用兩人一組、全班分組、男女分組的形式進(jìn)行朗讀比賽。教師說(shuō),Now,please read in pairs first(兩人一組)。OK,let's try it together.Boys read , I can see a cat.Girls read , I can see a dog.Let's try it.Very good.Now these three lines read “I can see a cat.”And these three lines read“I can see a dog.”Then, these lines again,and then these lines again.OK, let's try it.當(dāng)大家能很熟練地說(shuō)出這些句子之后,教師說(shuō),Very good.Now let's play a game.Please close your books.Close your eyes.教師讓學(xué)生閉上眼睛之后,馬上把動(dòng)物移開(kāi),桌子上或黑板上只放著或貼著若干個(gè)猴子,并問(wèn)大家,Can you see monkeys ? 重復(fù)幾遍,希望每個(gè)人都能答出Yes, I can.通常,較聰明的孩子預(yù)先看到了該課的句型或已翻書(shū)看過(guò),所以他們能回答教師所提出的問(wèn)題。這時(shí)教師拿出兩只貓的實(shí)物或圖片,讓大家看一眼并迅速藏起來(lái)問(wèn)大家,Can you see the cats ?學(xué)生可能回答No, I can't.這時(shí),教師以此做進(jìn)一步的練習(xí),讓一個(gè)學(xué)生拿個(gè)東西或圖片到前面,讓大家迅速看一眼,并用Can you see the...?的句型問(wèn)大家。最后再回到教材的第5部分,說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱,讓學(xué)生們邊聽(tīng)錄音,邊一起說(shuō),可以不看書(shū)。活動(dòng)之后再進(jìn)行別的教學(xué)活動(dòng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Group competition 教師將全班同學(xué)分成兩個(gè)組,進(jìn)行說(shuō)句子比賽,兩邊的同學(xué)都必須用I can see...的句型說(shuō)句子,一邊說(shuō)一個(gè),輪流進(jìn)行,但一放不能重復(fù)對(duì)方說(shuō)過(guò)的句子。每說(shuō)對(duì)一個(gè)句子,教師就在黑板上給那個(gè)組記一分,但不扣分。最后看哪一個(gè)組的同學(xué)說(shuō)的句子多。教師可以用英語(yǔ)這樣說(shuō),Now, let's have a match.We devide our class into two groups.One is A, the other is B.We'll see which group can say more sentences.For example, I can see a...If you say a correct sentence, I'll write it on the blackboard.But remember you can't repeat what others have said.For example, Zhang Hua says ,''I can see a dog.“You can't say ”I can see a dog, too." Do you understand ? Let's begin.Which group wants to be the first one? 課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 4 and Part 5 of

Unit 16 and read with the tape.聽(tīng)第16單元的第4和第5部分,并跟著朗讀。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

第三篇:劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案

鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Unit 1 Greetings Unit 2 who is the first Unit 3 Catch and run Unit 4 Color it green Unit 5 Let’s play unit6 Hide and seek unit7 Point to your nose unit8 How many doors? unit9 Tell your friends.unit10 Let?s do it.unit11 Let?s guess.unit12 Bounce a ball.unit13 Exercise our body.unit14 Clap our hands.unit15 I can draw it.unit16 I can see it.Unit 1 Greetings Teaching aims and demands:

1)can use simple English greet others 2)can say“Good morning!” “Good afternoon “Good evening” 3)Can read the new words about letter A a 4)can speak out the sentences of part 7

二、Important and difficult points: What?s this? It?s the letter Aa.Good morning!Good afternoon!Good evening.Hello!Hi!Slide

三、Teaching Steps : Step1 Greetings:

Good morning /afternoon!Boys and girls how are you today? ……

Ask one student to stand up and say Hello to him or her.and encourage him or her to answer “hello!” Then ask some other students to practice this sentence.Step 2:Call their names and say hello to them.Hello Ming Ming Hello, Dan Dan.Hello Fang Fang …… Step 3: Presentation Show the students some pictures about morning and ask, what?s the picture say?----Morning, Yes, its morning teach the new word.Then show another picture and then teach the word afternoon and the same way to the word evening.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Step 4: After learning the short sentences, we will learn an English song, teach the song and practice in groups or in pairs Step 5: show a model slide(this is a slide, what does it like? Yes, it likes the letter Aa).Write the letter Aa on the blackboard and teach the letter A a A is the slide, Slide on the A a.Step 6 teach the words about the letter A a : ape ace alien then practice some times.Step 7 Teach them how to write letter Aa Step 8 :Do some exercises 1)Do the exercises on page 4 of the students? book 2)match them 3)Good morning Hello!Good night.Good afternoon.Good evening.Good morning.Hello!Good night.Good afternoon!Good evening

Unit 2 who is the first Teaching aims and demands : *They can understand some simple actions and do it;*They can do “Stand up “”Sit down”,” Come here “, “Go back “., * Can understand the meaning of “up “and “”down”.*Can read B b and some new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 5

二、Important and difficult points What?s this? Stand up.Sit down.Come here.Go back Hands pens pencils feet cat snail back bee ball beef

三、teaching method: 本單元的教學(xué)重點(diǎn)是游戲,通過(guò)大家一起做動(dòng)作來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ),也就是我們常說(shuō)的,“玩中學(xué),學(xué)中玩”。教師一到課堂里就可以邊做手勢(shì)邊說(shuō),Now ,stand up ,sit down, Stand up!sit down.說(shuō)的時(shí)候可以先慢后快,也可以讓學(xué)生無(wú)法預(yù)料。大家基本上不出什么錯(cuò)誤的時(shí)候,教師就可以跑到教室的后面叫一個(gè)同學(xué)說(shuō),Come here!Come here!等到學(xué)生來(lái)了之后,教師可以說(shuō)Go back.Go back.Go back.然后再叫另外的同學(xué),在這四個(gè)句子中來(lái)回變換花樣,最好是時(shí)常有所變化。等大家熟悉了以后,、讓大家一起來(lái)說(shuō)順口溜,Up, Up, stand up.Down, down, sit down.Here, here, come here.Back ,back, go back.邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。然后教師開(kāi)始用實(shí)物來(lái)做替換練習(xí)。如,Hands up!Hands down.Hands up, hands down.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Books up.Books down.等等。

當(dāng)大家累了的時(shí)候,就讓大家休息一下,來(lái)給圖畫(huà)著色。著色之后再讓大家相互觀看,看誰(shuí)色彩上的好。接下來(lái)便是教字母的時(shí)間。教師首先讓學(xué)生們看兩個(gè)字母的卡片或形象的圖片(貓和蝸牛)。邊看大寫(xiě)B(tài)的時(shí)候,邊說(shuō)Big B is a cat.然后拿小寫(xiě)b說(shuō),Small b is a snail.The cat and the snail.They are the letter Bb,等.讓大家反復(fù)說(shuō),反復(fù)練習(xí),然后,讓小組的同學(xué)進(jìn)行朗誦比賽,看看哪個(gè)組最好。在學(xué)字母的時(shí)候,注意把這幾個(gè)詞給學(xué)生,讓他們練習(xí)一下。其中還有:bee, ball, beet字母組合等。在適當(dāng)?shù)臅r(shí)候,讓學(xué)生放松一下,可以隨時(shí)讓他們做一些動(dòng)作,即復(fù)習(xí)了所學(xué)內(nèi)容,有有助于學(xué)生上課保持新鮮感,更有興趣參與到學(xué)習(xí)中來(lái)。請(qǐng)一個(gè)學(xué)生到講臺(tái)上去做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)在下面說(shuō)他做的動(dòng)作,看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得最快最準(zhǔn)確,老師可適當(dāng)給予獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。然后再換其他同學(xué)去,做到充分練習(xí)。四、Exercises : 1.Read and do: Stand up.Sit down.Come here Go back pen up.Pencil down Books up.Feed down…… 2.Let?s chant A.Up, up, stand up.Down, down,sit down.Here, here, come here.Back, back, go back.Up, up, stand up.Down, down, sit down Up, up, books up.Down down pencils down.Up up pens up, down down feet down.B Good morning, mummy!Good morning, daddy!Good afternoon, teacher!Good evening, my little cat!C.Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pen down!Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pencil down!

Unit 3 Catch and run Teaching aims and demands: *Can understand some simple actions and do it *Know the meaning of “catch、run.”

*Can read and write letter Bb and can read the new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 7 on page 11

二、Important and difficult points: catch!Run to the …… door table window boys girls blackboard teacher flowers cab cap

三、Teaching method and steps: Step1:Bring some toys to the classroom at the beginning of the class, throw them to the classes one by one and say: Catch!If they can understand what?s meaning, take out the pictures show to them and teach the new words: ball, door, window, blackboard, teacher, flowers Step2: Go to the playground play games and learn: Please be ready.Run!員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Group them into boys and girls.Have a rally race.Then queue in a line, do some actions(Who is the fastest): Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Then chant it and do it: Catch a ball, run to the door.Catch a pen, run to Ben.Catch a pencil, run to the middle.Catch, run, catch, run, catch and run.Step3:Go back to the classroom, have a rest, then color it on page 12.then listen and circles on page 12 Step4:take a piece of paper and ask them ?What?s this ?It?s a piece of paper ,yes ,now cut it into a shape of big moon ,and then ask :What?s this now ?---Yes ,it?s moon.What does it look like ike a smiling face , like the letter C c.Who said it likes letter C c ,will be prized.Say: c is the moon, C c is the moon.We are on the moon, we are on the moon.Step5: Show them pictures and teach: cab, cap, and cat.Can add some words about Cc.Step6: Teach them how to write letter Cc.Step7: Exercises: Speak out and do actions: Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Stand!Sit!Catch!Run!Ask and answer in pairs: What?s this? It?s a big C.What?s this? It?s a small c.Practice reading and writing letter C c

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)Unit 4 Color it green

一、Teaching aims and demands:

*can understand and speak out the words about some colors *they can do color the things after the order *使學(xué)生能用兩種問(wèn)句問(wèn)問(wèn)題

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分和練習(xí)1中所給的句子和單詞

二、交際句型:

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Color it green.What color do you like? Which is the blue duck?

三、交際詞匯: pink, green, indigo, red, yellow, purple

四、具體教學(xué)方法:

可以首先拿出一只剪好的白色鴨子對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),This is a duck.This is a duck.I have many ducks.Look, one, two, three, four and five.They are white.Do you know“white”? Now , this is indigo.This is red.教師拿出兩種顏色給學(xué)生看。接著教師用剛才的鴨子舉例,說(shuō),Look here,this is a white duck.This is a indigo duck.Now, look, I have many ducks on the blackboard.What color are they? This is a white duck, this is a indigo duck.從剛才新教的詞匯開(kāi)始,然后再教新的顏色詞,每教一個(gè)新詞之前要復(fù)習(xí)一下剛學(xué)過(guò)的詞,可以將鴨子貼在黑板上,下面再貼上與鴨子顏色一樣的光電紙,然后,教師指著鴨子說(shuō),This is a duck.It?s blue.It?s a blue duck.然后教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can say the sentences about these ducks?鼓勵(lì)同學(xué)們到前面來(lái)描述。當(dāng)一兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)完之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。接下來(lái),教師選出一些漂亮、鮮艷的顏色,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),I?ve got lots of colors.What color do you like? 問(wèn)不同的同學(xué),如果該學(xué)生說(shuō),I like green.教師就給該生一個(gè)綠色的小蘋(píng)果(事先剪好不同顏色的蘋(píng)果或其它圖案)

教師教字母D d的時(shí)候,可以直接拿出D字母,然后再拿出帶有豎琴的圖片進(jìn)行比較,同時(shí)帶著大家一起說(shuō),Big D is a harp.Small d is a chair.The girl is sitting on the chair, playing the harp.教師邊說(shuō)邊指著圖片和字母Dd.接著教師說(shuō),Look here.What’s this? It’s a dog.D-dog.What?s this? It’s a doll.D-doll.教師帶著大家朗讀D字母音的同時(shí),可以帶出的讀音,并讓學(xué)生看圖片。

在做練習(xí)的時(shí)候,教師引導(dǎo)大家看畫(huà)有彩虹的圖。教師可以說(shuō),Look, we?ve got a nice rainbow on page 16.This is a rainbow.It has seven colors.Let?s see.What color are they? 這時(shí)教師啟發(fā)學(xué)生說(shuō)出這七種顏色。

在做練習(xí)3時(shí),教師先讓大家把圖涂上顏色,然后可以在全班進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)涂色涂的最好。具體操作如下:教師可以讓學(xué)生一行一行地拿著自己的課本到前面來(lái),大家進(jìn)行推薦。最后表彰前十名同學(xué)。

五、課后作業(yè):

一、.Draw five ducks with different colors and write each color next to the duck.辨認(rèn)dog doll door

二、.Read and draw:

1)A cat,2)Flowers

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 3)A cap.4)A dog.三、.Write down the words which have letter “D d”.door cat boy doll duck

blue pink red yellow color

dog green pencil indigo ace

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)Unit 5 Let’s play

一、Teaching aims and demands * 使學(xué)生能正確地做出向右轉(zhuǎn),向左轉(zhuǎn)的動(dòng)作 * 讓學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)出拍手歌歌謠

* 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ee 及所給單詞的讀音 * 使學(xué)生能讀出第四部分所給出的句子

二、交際句型:Turn right Turn left Hold your hands and stand in a circle You have one, I have one.Two little children see a big man.三、交際詞匯: one ,two ,three ,four ,five ,a boy ,four boys ,a girl ,four girls

四、教學(xué)用具:蘋(píng)果,梨,香蕉,帽子的有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨镒帜傅拇笮?xiě)及單詞讀音圖片。

五、具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí),先讓學(xué)生做一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)作,比如,Stand in two lines.Turn right.Turn left.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這些句子的時(shí)候,幫他們完成動(dòng)作,以至于讓他們理解這幾句話的意思然后,集體一起說(shuō)課文的第2部分。當(dāng)學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)這些內(nèi)容以后,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行表演,邊表演邊說(shuō)。這里教師特別要注意全班同學(xué)的整體性,不要讓任何人掉隊(duì)。所以,練習(xí)的遍數(shù)要多,人員要普遍,不要留死角。換句話說(shuō),全班的每一個(gè)人要有充分的練習(xí)時(shí)間。在做這部分的時(shí)候,讓所有的學(xué)生都參與到這個(gè)活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái),在游戲活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái)領(lǐng)略新的知識(shí)。

在學(xué)習(xí)完第1,2部分后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家進(jìn)行單,復(fù)數(shù)概念的練習(xí),由于是初次與學(xué)生見(jiàn)面,所以教師只通過(guò)數(shù)數(shù)的方式,讓學(xué)生知道1~5的含義就可以了,至于說(shuō)a boy , four boys , a girl ,four girls ,也只是讓學(xué)生知道有變化而已。在學(xué)習(xí)字母E e的時(shí)候,教師首先拿出字母E e卡片,然后再引導(dǎo)學(xué)生看教材的Ee字母的變

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 形圖。同時(shí)帶領(lǐng)大家一起說(shuō),Big E is for sail ,small e is for whale.The ship has a sail, sailing behind the whale.教師說(shuō)此段內(nèi)容時(shí),可以用節(jié)奏的方式說(shuō),并讓學(xué)生拍著節(jié)奏說(shuō)。經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)邊的練習(xí),然后進(jìn)行組與組之間的比賽。

在學(xué)生大聲朗讀之后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家學(xué)習(xí)字母組合的讀音。首先教師強(qiáng)調(diào)的讀音,然后直接以拼音的方式拼出單詞即可。比如,b—e-e=bee ,f—e-e—t=feet等,教師只要帶領(lǐng)拼讀就行了。

六、教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and act 上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK , everyone.Stand up.Sit down.Stand up.Turn right.Turn left.Stand in two lines.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這部分的內(nèi)容的時(shí)候,教師一定要伴隨一定的動(dòng)作,不然學(xué)生不會(huì)理解,也不會(huì)去做動(dòng)作,Hands up , one ,two(拍手)Hands down , one, two(拍手).Hands right, one , two(拍手)Hands left , one two(拍手)。做這個(gè)活動(dòng)時(shí),教師可以先由慢再逐漸加快,特別是說(shuō),hands up ,one ,two 的時(shí)候可以快一些,讓整個(gè)的句子富有節(jié)奏感。教學(xué)活動(dòng) 2 pat-a-cake 教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)此段歌謠的最后方法是兩個(gè)人一組,一邊拍手,一邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)的句子。甚至教師在拍手的空隙間可以加進(jìn)一個(gè)動(dòng)作(比如,高大的人,上學(xué),種樹(shù)等動(dòng)作)。在大家熟練的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還可以讓同學(xué)們之間進(jìn)行比賽,比拍手的協(xié)調(diào)性及英語(yǔ)句字的準(zhǔn)確性等。在用英語(yǔ)教學(xué)時(shí),教師只需簡(jiǎn)單講一下即可。如,now ,everyone , let’s play Pat-a-cake.Do you know? Let `s try it.You have one, I have one, two little children see a big man.Do you understand? Let `s do it in pairs.First you do it after me.Ready? Let `s start.教學(xué)活動(dòng) 3 Color it!

教師上課前復(fù)印好若干張黑白圖片。上課時(shí),讓學(xué)生著色比賽。黑板圖片的選擇可以是自行畫(huà)的,也可以從某教材中復(fù)印下來(lái),但筆畫(huà)不宜太多太難。

七、課后作業(yè)

與爸爸媽媽一起說(shuō)拍手歌。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)unit6 Hide and seek 教學(xué)目的和要求

* 使學(xué)生通過(guò)游戲活動(dòng)培養(yǎng)對(duì)英語(yǔ)的興趣 * 使學(xué)生初步掌握簡(jiǎn)單的指令 * 使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉所學(xué)的顏色 * 使學(xué)生掌握字母及相關(guān)單詞的讀音 交際句型:Show me your book , please.Here you are Quick!Hide your pencil.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ Where is it ? 交際詞匯: Pencil, crayon , eraser ,behind my back , in the desk 教學(xué)用具:鉛筆,橡皮,蠟筆,書(shū),書(shū)包,圖片及實(shí)物 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí)首先拿給學(xué)生們看一件較新鮮的東西。教師說(shuō),Look!I’ve got something in my bag.Ah,here it is.這時(shí)教師拿出一件特殊的玩具,讓學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Let me show you another thing.Look,here it is.Is it good? 學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Look ,let me show you my new pen.This is my pen.It’s new.說(shuō)到此,教師突然問(wèn),Li Ming , have you got a pen ?Show me your pen , please.(講此話時(shí),教師一定要用手勢(shì))Wang Fang, show me your book, please.Thank you.Now, everybody, practice it in pairs.You say ,Show me your pencil , please.’教師邊說(shuō)邊給出節(jié)奏,這樣,學(xué)生就容易上口。

在教本單元時(shí)教師不要太性急,特別是前面的幾部分,教師要一部分一部分地進(jìn)行。比如,教師說(shuō),Now hide your pencil.Quick!Hide your pencil 然后教師去找.Ah ,here.Ah , in the desk.Ah, behind your back 等等。然后,教師再對(duì)大家說(shuō),.Now hide your book!Hide your book.接著教師又開(kāi)始找,然后再說(shuō),Hide your pen.Hide your eraser.等等。

進(jìn)行第二步驟時(shí),教師說(shuō),Who can come here and hide my book?等到學(xué)生藏好以后,教師說(shuō)Where is it? Where is it?邊說(shuō)邊找。

接下來(lái),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, now, let’s play a game ,Who wants to be here?當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)后,教師讓他/她閉上眼睛,或者面對(duì)黑板,然后讓某個(gè)人把東西藏起來(lái).藏好后教師讓這個(gè)學(xué)生問(wèn)OK ,where ’s the pencil ? where’s it? 大家一起說(shuō),There it is!There it is!教師帶領(lǐng)大家做這個(gè)游戲時(shí),應(yīng)該練習(xí)說(shuō)第4部分的內(nèi)容。

大家活動(dòng)了一會(huì)兒后,教師拿出字母卡片,讓大家跟讀發(fā)音,同時(shí)給出幾個(gè)詞,如,(課文中出現(xiàn)的)face ,flag ,foot.并讓大家看跳臺(tái),同時(shí)說(shuō)出該段的順口溜-----Diving-platform, diving-platform ,Ff is the diving-platform, Boys are diving ,girls aye diving ,Ff is the diving-platform.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and point 教師首先不讓同學(xué)們看書(shū),而是問(wèn)大家Where is the door?大家用手指門(mén).Where is the TV? Where is the table? Where is the blackboard? Where is ?? Where are the windows?等等.大家對(duì)這個(gè)句型了解了之后,教師再讓大家打開(kāi)書(shū),聽(tīng)錄音, 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Colour it!教師讓大家準(zhǔn)備好彩色筆,然后將本單元第6部分的圖片上色,但要規(guī)定時(shí)間,教師可這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)Now , everyone ,pleas take out your crayons.let’s colour the pictures on page 22.We ‘ve got eight pictures.You have 3 minutes(教師指表)Let’s see who is the first and whose pictures are the best.Now ,are you ready? Start!教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 LISTEN and circle 在學(xué)習(xí)完了第7部分的內(nèi)容之后,教師可以安排聽(tīng)力內(nèi)容.練習(xí)2的答案是:1(d)2(b)3(c)4 課后作業(yè)

每人回家在紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩,男孩,女孩都可以,并給孩子取個(gè)名字。

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ unit7 Point to your nose 教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)人體面部的各個(gè)部位 *使學(xué)生能清楚地辨認(rèn)人體的主要部位

*使學(xué)生初步掌握I have ?This is? There are?的句型 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Gg及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:

What’s this? It’s a nose.What are these ? They’re eyes.Point to your nose.This is my mouth.These are my feet.I have two ears.交際詞匯:Nose, mouth , face, eyes, teeth, feet, hands, legs, arms, hair 教學(xué)用具:教學(xué)圖片(人身體的各個(gè)部位)娃娃兩個(gè)(男女各一個(gè))具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿一個(gè)布娃娃開(kāi)始,教師說(shuō),Look ,I’ve got a beautiful girl.Her name is Mary.She’s 6 years old.Now ,let’s see.This is her face , nose and mouth..These are her eyes, ears and teeth.Now follow me ,face ,nose ,mouth ,eyes ,ears ,teeth.Now ,who wants to come here and show us her face ?Very good.Now you say each part and everybody follows you.(這時(shí)讓全班同學(xué)跟他一起說(shuō)。)重復(fù)類(lèi)似幾遍之后,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, listen and act.Point to your nose.Point to your face ,point to your mouth.point to your eyes.point to your ears.point to your teeth.教師在做此活動(dòng)時(shí),可以采取不同的形式。比如,教師說(shuō),全班同學(xué)一起做;也可以采取同桌的同學(xué)一個(gè)人說(shuō),一個(gè)人做;也可以找一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面給指令,大家一起做。總之,教學(xué)的目的是讓大家盡快熟悉所學(xué)的單詞和句型。接下來(lái),教師可以組織大家一起玩Simon says的游戲。教師說(shuō),Simon says,Touch your face.touch your nose.Simon says,Touch your ears.等游戲之后,教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)本單元的第3部分。說(shuō)這一部分的時(shí)候,教師要帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起邊說(shuō)邊做,由慢到快,最好還有節(jié)奏。這樣,同學(xué)能夠很快的掌握此段內(nèi)容。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多的情況下,教師可以給出I Have?的句型。教師首先講I have two eyes.I have a nose.I have two ears.I have a mouth.I have many teeth.I have black hair.起初,學(xué)生并不知道have是什么意思,教師只需在黑板上寫(xiě)有,而不需整句話進(jìn)行翻譯。

然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例,I have a face.I have a mouth.I have two ears.I have two eyes等等。教師說(shuō)完之后,馬上找一兩個(gè)同學(xué)復(fù)述,最后再讓全班同學(xué)兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

在個(gè)人和集體練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師再帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起活動(dòng)做練習(xí)5,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Ok, everybody ,let’s do a game.Stand up pleas!Everybody!Follow me.Head ,head, touch your head?(按照課文的內(nèi)容把動(dòng)作做完)如果大家做的好,紀(jì)律也比較好,接著做第4部分的Chant it.這也要求邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。教師要特別注意,學(xué)生不僅要會(huì)做動(dòng)作,更重要的是會(huì)說(shuō)每一句話。所以盡量多練習(xí),反復(fù)練習(xí)。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多,感到比較累的時(shí)候,教師接著進(jìn)行字母教學(xué)。教師可以先示范,拿著字母G g說(shuō),This is G g.Yes, it’s G g(重復(fù)幾遍)。在學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō),逐漸會(huì)了的情況下,教師自然帶出順口溜。Mum is a big G.A baby’s on a small g.Mum and the baby ,they are very happy.員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1Listen and touch 教師自己可以在一張紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)大兔子。上課時(shí),將兔子的圖掛在黑板上,讓兩個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),聽(tīng)指令,做動(dòng)作,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)動(dòng)作快,動(dòng)作慢的同學(xué)回座位,再換另一個(gè)人。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),look ,I’ve got a big rabbit here.I’ m putting this on the blackboard.I want two pupils to come to the front.I say ‘ear’, they touch the ear.I say `mouth’ ,they touch the mouth, do you understand ?Who wants to come here? Good , Let’s begin.Nose ,… 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Chanting match 教師教完第4部分之后,讓同學(xué)們進(jìn)行說(shuō)唱比賽可以采取男生和女生分開(kāi)的方式,也可以采取一組一組的方式。看看哪個(gè)組說(shuō)得做得最好。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 教師在黑板上畫(huà)一個(gè)沒(méi)有鼻子的孩子,然后,讓學(xué)生上來(lái)給這個(gè)孩子貼鼻子。教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)用紙畫(huà)好,剪好的鼻子。上來(lái)的同學(xué)要離黑板有一定的距離。教師要用布將孩子的眼睛蒙住,然后讓學(xué)生轉(zhuǎn)兩個(gè)圈,再開(kāi)始貼鼻子,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)貼的位置最準(zhǔn)確。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, we’ve got a boy here ,but he has no nose.(手勢(shì))Who can come here and put the nose on his face? 等同學(xué)上來(lái)之后,教師說(shuō)Good, but we have to cover your eyes.You have to turn around twice.Ok., go and stick the nose on the boy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Draw and show 上節(jié)課結(jié)束的時(shí)候,教師給大家留了一個(gè)作業(yè),讓每個(gè)人回家畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩。這一次,教師利用上課的機(jī)會(huì)進(jìn)行點(diǎn)評(píng)。首先,教師在黑板前拴上一個(gè)線繩,然后讓孩子把圖片用曲別針掛在線繩上,最后讓全班同學(xué)進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看看哪個(gè)同學(xué)畫(huà)的最好。然后,教師給予一定獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。通常獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)的人數(shù)應(yīng)盡量達(dá)到四分之一,這樣,孩子感到稍加努力,都能得到獎(jiǎng)品。課后作業(yè):

Draw an animal of any kind and write down its nose ,mouth, ears ,teeth ,etc.(在一張紙上畫(huà)任何一種動(dòng)物,并用英語(yǔ)寫(xiě)上那兒是鼻子,嘴。耳朵,牙齒等。)

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案(上)unit8 How many doors? 1使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉1`5的數(shù)字 2 使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)6~10的數(shù)字 3 使學(xué)生加深對(duì)單`復(fù)數(shù)的概念 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母及所給單詞的讀音 使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型: How many doors? It’s a book.This is Hh.It’s letter H h 員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 交際詞匯: One?ten, orange ,pear, apple, banana ,door, window , chair, TV ,book , pen ,pencile 教學(xué)用具:1~10的單詞卡,有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨铮〔伎诖瑥椙蛉舾蓚€(gè)。小獎(jiǎng)品,字母的大小寫(xiě)及掛圖的圖片。具體教學(xué)方式:

首先教師拿1~10的數(shù)字讓學(xué)生看,同時(shí)教師用英語(yǔ)發(fā)每個(gè)數(shù)字的讀音,然后教師讓大家跟著一起說(shuō)這些數(shù)子。教師也可以拿一些書(shū)本來(lái)數(shù),邊數(shù)邊說(shuō)。講復(fù)數(shù)概念的時(shí)候,教師只需先拿起一本書(shū),說(shuō)a book,然后再拿起一本書(shū),把兩本書(shū)放在一起時(shí)說(shuō),two books教師特別要強(qiáng)調(diào)的發(fā)音,以便引起學(xué)生的注意。然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例說(shuō)a desk, two desks ,a table,two tables ,a door, two doors, a pen ,two pens, a pencil, two pencils等。教師舉例之后,馬上讓學(xué)生來(lái)說(shuō),教師說(shuō)第一部分,讓學(xué)生說(shuō)第2部分。比如,教師說(shuō)a book,并馬上把兩本書(shū)放在一起,示意大家說(shuō),two books,?大家熟悉了復(fù)數(shù)的概念時(shí),教師就可以引入課文中的 boy.I like toy cars.交際詞匯:boy ,toy, car, girl , doll 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師首先用一個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做自我介紹,教師可以藏在布娃娃的后面,模仿小娃娃的的

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 說(shuō)話聲,說(shuō),Hello, My name is Mary.I?m Mary.I?m six.I?m a

girl.I like dolls.當(dāng)說(shuō)到dolls的時(shí)候,教師應(yīng)拿起兩個(gè)其他的布娃娃,放在該娃娃的手里。然后,教師再重復(fù)一遍。說(shuō)完之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can come here and say like this ?教師找一個(gè)或兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)之后,讓大家再聽(tīng)第二段。Very good,now,listen to me.I have another friend.His name is Tom.說(shuō)到此教師拿起第二個(gè)娃娃,說(shuō),Hello, I?m Tom.I?m seven.I?m a boy.I like toy cars.說(shuō)完之后,教師重復(fù)一遍。然后,繼續(xù)讓兩三個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái)說(shuō)這個(gè)Tom。在大家都知道 hand.This is a ruler.That is a crayon.交際詞匯:book, pencil-box,crayon, ruler, window, door, boy, girl.具體教學(xué)方式:

在前面的幾個(gè)單元中,我們都先后學(xué)習(xí)了一些文具用品的單詞,但本單元的重點(diǎn)在于復(fù)習(xí)這些文具用品的單詞,并能了解一些介詞的基本位置,如,in , on ,under ,between及next to,并圍繞介詞來(lái)開(kāi)展一些活動(dòng)。上課開(kāi)始時(shí),教師可以拿著已經(jīng)熟悉的文具問(wèn)學(xué)生們,What?s this ?What?s

that?當(dāng)學(xué)生熟悉這些單詞后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起做動(dòng)作。教師說(shuō),Put the book on your hand.讓大家馬上做動(dòng)作,然后,教師接著說(shuō),Put the ruler in your hand.Put the book under your chair.除了這三句話以外,教師還可以說(shuō),Put your book in your bag.Put the pencil in your pencil-box.Put the book between the two pencils.Put the crayon

next to the book.等

教師做這些動(dòng)作時(shí),讓學(xué)生跟著一起模仿,而不要一上課就給學(xué)生解釋什么是介詞。

做完一遍動(dòng)作后,教師還可以繼續(xù)用別的句子來(lái)鞏固剛才所練習(xí)的 book in your hand.等。然后教師用一個(gè)乒乓球和一個(gè)粉筆盒給學(xué)生單個(gè)示范,The ball is on the box.The ball is in the box.The ball is under the box.The ball is between the two boxes.The ball is next to the box.Put the ball behind the box.在教師解釋的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓每個(gè)人都拿著一支鉛筆跟老師一起說(shuō)、一起做。

經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)遍的練習(xí)后,教師要讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行描述,最后選幾個(gè)人在全班進(jìn)行描述。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 此外,還可以進(jìn)行其它教學(xué)活動(dòng)。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the chant in the next Unit and say it with the tape.預(yù)習(xí)下單元中的說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。

unit11 Let?s guess.*使學(xué)生能掌握簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)句What?s in the bag? Where?s the bird? *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)和鞏固所學(xué)過(guò)的有關(guān)文具及水果方面的單詞 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Kk及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:What?s in the bag? Where ?s the bird? It?s on the big K.It?s under the small K.交際詞匯:pencil, pen, ruler, bag, apple, pear, banana, boy, girl, teacher 具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師手里拿著一個(gè)盒子,對(duì)大家說(shuō),Look, I?ve got a box in my hand.Guess, what?s in the box ? If your guess is right, I?ll give this to you.OK, let?s guess what?s in the box ?教師讓大家猜的時(shí)候,把It?s a...的句型寫(xiě)在黑板上,目的是讓大家反復(fù)運(yùn)用這個(gè)句型。當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)猜到以后,教師就可以把東西送給他/她。接下來(lái),教師再讓大家猜書(shū)包里的東西,還是用同樣的方法。最后,教師再讓學(xué)生猜自己手里、口袋里的東西。通過(guò)這些反復(fù)的猜東西游戲活動(dòng),學(xué)生會(huì)復(fù)習(xí)到許多已學(xué)過(guò)的單詞。

在教師的猜謎語(yǔ)游戲之后,教師讓每個(gè)同學(xué)自己拿一件東西,讓自己的朋友猜,如果能一次猜中的就舉手告訴給教師,教師可以給獎(jiǎng)品。隨后,找一個(gè)同學(xué)拿著自己的東西到前面來(lái)讓大家猜。總之,一開(kāi)始上課教師就要給學(xué)生帶來(lái)一種熱烈的氣氛。

接下來(lái),教師帶著大家一起說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱(課文的第3部分)。教學(xué)活動(dòng) See them all.教師將許多文具用品及部分水果放在一個(gè)書(shū)包里,做游戲時(shí),將所有的東西倒在講桌上。然后,馬上用一張報(bào)紙蓋住。這時(shí)教師叫一個(gè)同學(xué),站在東西前面,教師迅速地讓該同學(xué)看一眼,然后讓該生說(shuō)桌子上有什么。如該生說(shuō)了五個(gè)單詞,就在該生所在組的記錄上寫(xiě)上五,然后找另外一個(gè)組的同學(xué)上來(lái)繼續(xù)看東西,最后看哪個(gè)組同學(xué)記得多。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I?ve got many things on the desk.I?ll ask one pupil from each group to come here and have a look.Then you tell us

what things are on the table.OK?Group One , who wants to come? Good.Now , look!OK, what are they ? 一組之后,教師再叫第二組。課后作業(yè):

Draw five balls and colour each ball with a different colour.用五種不同的顏色畫(huà)五個(gè)不同的球。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

unit12 Bounce a ball.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)1~10的數(shù)字 *讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步分清各種顏色 *讓學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用兩個(gè)特殊疑問(wèn)句Who....? Where...? *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ll及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Who can bounce a ball? I can bounce the ball.Where?s the mouse? It?s in the boot.交際詞匯:one....ten,catch, here,small, big ,blue, red, yellow, etc.具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿出一個(gè)乒乓球讓大家看看,Look, I?ve got a ping pang ball.It?s small.But I?ve also got a big ball.Look.This ball is small.(指小球)This ball is small.It?s white.This

ball

is big.It?s brown.I can bounce the ball.Lokk,one ,two, three.教師拍一會(huì)兒球,停住,Who can come here and bounce a ball? 這時(shí)教師請(qǐng)一個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)拍球,大家一起數(shù)數(shù)。到10的時(shí)候,教師說(shuō),OK, stop, you?re very good.Who else can come here and bounce a ball?(教師再叫一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái),重復(fù)一遍,然后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)做下一個(gè)教學(xué)活動(dòng)。)教學(xué)活動(dòng) Throw it and catch it.教師讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái),遞給他們一個(gè)皮球。讓第一個(gè)同學(xué)將球扔給任何一個(gè)同學(xué),扔的時(shí)候要說(shuō),Catch!其他同學(xué)喊Here!Here!凡是扔過(guò)的同學(xué)就自動(dòng)坐下,其余的同學(xué)繼續(xù)扔。直到最后一個(gè)同學(xué)將球傳回給教師。教師可以這樣用英語(yǔ)說(shuō),OK, boys and girls, let?s have a ball game.Everybody, stand up ,please.When you throw the ball,you say “Catch”, then you throw the ball to your friend.The others will say,“Here!here!”When you finish, you sit down.Let?s see who is the last person.The last person throws the ball back to the teacher again.Understand? OK, let?s begin.Catch!教學(xué)活動(dòng)

Draw and hang.教師讓學(xué)生每人畫(huà)一個(gè)球,可大、也可小,并涂上顏色,最后,教師讓大家把所有的球都掛在線繩上,讓大家參觀,并評(píng)出十個(gè)最好的球。課后作業(yè):

Find a pingpong ball and colour it and bring it to the classroom next time.找一個(gè)乒乓球,把它涂上顏色,看誰(shuí)涂得最好看。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ unit13 Exercise our body.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)一些鍛煉身體的一般用語(yǔ)

*使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂基本句子并按照要求做動(dòng)作

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Mm及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂和讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Stand in a row.Bend down.Straighten up.Touch the left foot.Right foot up/ down.What?s that over there? Is it a big mountain? What are they doing ? They are swimming.Are they happy? Yes, they are.交際詞匯:up, down,front , back, row, line 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Do as the teacher do!本單元的句型比較多,教師要立足于讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂并操練,而不必去講任何的句型。建議:上課的時(shí)候,教師就讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái)。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK,everyone , listen and do as I do.Stand up!Sit down!Now quickly, let?s do it again.重復(fù)起立、坐下的目的是讓大家跟著一起迅速做動(dòng)作,不要拖拖拉拉。教師接著說(shuō) Now listen carefully.Stand in a row.Quickly!In a row.Now listen carefully, stand in a line.In a line.Very good.Listen again.Stand in a row.Stand in a line.Very good.Now stand in three lines.Three lines.(手勢(shì))Follow me.Bend down.Straight up.Touch the left foot.Touch the right foot.Right foot up.Right foot down.Left foot down.Hands up!Hands down 在做這些動(dòng)作的時(shí)候,教師要把這些動(dòng)作反復(fù)的做,知道熟練為止。在教師給指令的基礎(chǔ)上,教師鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生跟著老師一邊說(shuō)一邊做。這樣,學(xué)生能說(shuō)這些基本的句子,在大家都知道如何說(shuō)以后,教師讓學(xué)生一起給指令。這時(shí)候,教師獨(dú)自做動(dòng)作,記住,教師做動(dòng)作只是為了檢查學(xué)生是否熟練掌握了這些基本句型。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Act it in pairs 如果學(xué)生紀(jì)律比較好,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)給指令,做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Listen and do.在做好動(dòng)作的基礎(chǔ)上,讓學(xué)生邊聽(tīng)第2部分的錄音,邊做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Colour it!接著,教師可以讓學(xué)生給50頁(yè)上的兩個(gè)孩子上顏色,在上顏色的時(shí),教師要規(guī)定時(shí)間,一般來(lái)說(shuō)三分鐘就可以了,然后馬上檢查哪位學(xué)生涂得好,進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5

Ask and answer.涂好顏色之后,教師可以拿出字母Mm卡片,把它放在稍遠(yuǎn)的地方,然后教師用兩個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話。教師拿其中一個(gè)說(shuō) what?s that over there?Is it a big mountain? 拿著另一個(gè)說(shuō)No, it?s letter Mm.教師再重復(fù)一遍,試圖讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂每一句話。然后教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, let?s do the dialogue.I ask you a question.You answer my questions.教師在問(wèn)的時(shí)候特別要注意學(xué)生的發(fā)音,員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 在幾次的反復(fù)對(duì)話之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí),并檢查學(xué)生說(shuō)的是否正確。如果不夠熟練就繼續(xù)練習(xí)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)6 Show it to all.接下來(lái),教師拿出自制的小秋千,做成小孩蕩秋千的樣子,然后,叫一個(gè)學(xué)生來(lái)扶著秋千,并做動(dòng)作。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Who wants to come here and help me ? 等學(xué)生上來(lái)后,教師還是拿著兩個(gè)娃娃對(duì)話,What are they doing ? They are swinging.Are they happy? Yes, they are.教師給了幾遍示范之后,直接就可以問(wèn)學(xué)生,讓學(xué)生回答。如果學(xué)生回答時(shí)有發(fā)音等方面的錯(cuò)誤就及時(shí)糾正。教學(xué)活動(dòng)7 Practice it in pairs 然后,教師再讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行對(duì)話練習(xí),教師進(jìn)行適當(dāng)?shù)某椴椤T趯W(xué)生坐的時(shí)間比較長(zhǎng),需要活動(dòng)的時(shí)候,教師再帶著大家來(lái)進(jìn)行本單元第3部分的 Listen and read 最后教師讓學(xué)生一起聽(tīng)錄音,朗讀最后的短文。方式是,先讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)一兩遍錄音,然后教師帶讀一兩遍,最后讓學(xué)生自己讀,全班讀。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 1,2,3 of Unit 13 and do the actions with the tape.聽(tīng)13單元第1,2,3部分的朗讀材料,堅(jiān)持邊聽(tīng)邊做動(dòng)作。

unit14 Clap our hands.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生能掌握一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)詞表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)單、復(fù)數(shù)的用法 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)進(jìn)行時(shí)的表達(dá)方式

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)字母Nn的發(fā)音及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第4部分所給出的句子

交際句型:Pick up the stool.Stand around the tree.Stand up and go to the door.Put down the book and bring back the knife.Who? s under the big N ?

Who?s on the small n? 交際詞匯:one......ten, stool, bike , bee, earaser 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Clap our

hands!上課時(shí),教師首先帶著大家拍巴掌,練習(xí)各種節(jié)奏。比如,One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.接下來(lái),教師可以讓學(xué)生拍One, two/one, two, three, four

five/four

five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.教師讓學(xué)生邊拍手邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)數(shù)字。在學(xué)生有了一些熱身活動(dòng)之后,教師可以將 員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 學(xué)生帶入本單元的 Read and choose 學(xué)生進(jìn)行了大量的口語(yǔ)訓(xùn)練之后,教師讓學(xué)生做一些靜止的活動(dòng)。教師可以對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, please open your books , turn to page 56.Let?s do exercise 1.Choose the best answers.You read the first sentence here , and then choose the best answers here.Later we?re going to check the answers.We?ll see who has got the answers correct.教師說(shuō)這番話時(shí),有些學(xué)生可能聽(tīng)不懂,教師也不必?fù)?dān)心,這些學(xué)生只要看到別人在做什么就知道該怎么做了。但教師要培養(yǎng)孩子的聽(tīng)力能力,不要說(shuō)一句英語(yǔ),再把它翻成漢語(yǔ),這樣,說(shuō)了等于沒(méi)有說(shuō),因?yàn)楹⒆右虼藭?huì)產(chǎn)生依賴(lài)的想法,總盼著教師說(shuō)中文,否則就不去思考。學(xué)生做完之后,教師可以在全班進(jìn)行檢查,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)A,另一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)出正確的答案。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, let?s check the answers.Who wants to read A? Who wants to answer? Is it A, B, or C ? Who wants to try?這樣依次檢查。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Ask and answer.學(xué)習(xí)字母時(shí),教師拿出事先準(zhǔn)備好的Nn 字母的大寫(xiě)和小寫(xiě),同時(shí)在大寫(xiě)字母的下方放一個(gè)孩子的圖片。教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who?s under the big N? 接著再問(wèn)Who?s on the small n ? 在學(xué)生回答問(wèn)題的基礎(chǔ)上,教師給出學(xué)生正確的發(fā)音,Nn,并帶讀幾遍,同時(shí)還說(shuō)A boy is under the big N.A monkey is on the small n.以便讓學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō)。教師隨后讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),最后再檢查說(shuō)的效果(檢查兩三對(duì)同學(xué))。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)的還不夠好,教師應(yīng)糾正,并再給予一點(diǎn)時(shí)間進(jìn)行練習(xí)。等大家都掌握了讀音,教師再拿出字母Nn 的變形圖,用兩個(gè)娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話表演,引出要交流的 with the tape.Bring your crayons to the classroom 員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ next time.聽(tīng)第14單元第1部分的錄音,并模仿朗讀,下次帶彩色蠟筆。

unit15 I can draw it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步掌握有關(guān)水果及有關(guān)動(dòng)作的單詞 *使學(xué)生能按照指令畫(huà)出正確的圖案

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Oo及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Draw a big house.Draw a

boy in the house.What are these ? They?re Easter eggs.When is the Easter ? Next week.Who can draw a banana ? I can.Can you draw a window ? No, I can?t.交際詞匯:apple , orange, pear, banana, draw, colour , read , sing 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1

Show it and eat it!上課時(shí),教師首先手里拿著蘋(píng)果對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I?ve got something today.What?s this ?如果學(xué)生回答,It?s

an apple.教師應(yīng)說(shuō),Yes, you?re right.It?s an apple.Do you like apples?(注意要用復(fù)數(shù)形式)教師應(yīng)問(wèn)幾個(gè)學(xué)生,問(wèn)過(guò)幾個(gè)學(xué)生之后,教師說(shuō),Yes, I like apples, too.Now, I?m going to peel the apple.(邊說(shuō)邊削蘋(píng)果,然后自己吃一塊,表現(xiàn)出很愛(ài)吃的表情,緊接著問(wèn)學(xué)生)Do you like apples? Oh, yes, you like apples, too? OK, now, here you are.教師削一塊蘋(píng)果給學(xué)生吃,并繼續(xù)問(wèn)學(xué)生,并每人削一小塊。吃了一半以后,教師拿著蘋(píng)果和香蕉問(wèn)學(xué)生,Which do you like , apples or bananas ? 這時(shí),學(xué)生肯定要選擇一樣水果說(shuō)出來(lái),教師就可以檢查學(xué)生是否會(huì)說(shuō)。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)喜歡吃香蕉,教師也同樣削一塊香蕉給學(xué)生吃。總之,應(yīng)把要復(fù)習(xí)的水果單詞放在交流中進(jìn)行,同時(shí)可以加上其它的兩種水果,橘子和梨。在學(xué)生吃完,說(shuō)完之后,教師說(shuō),OK,now,please take out your crayons.I want you to draw pictures.Now , look at the first one.A green apple.Quick, draw a green apple here.在學(xué)生畫(huà)畫(huà)的時(shí)候,教師一定要控制時(shí)間。一般來(lái)說(shuō),一張圖只給1分鐘左右就可以了,否則會(huì)影響正常的教學(xué)。其它的圖畫(huà)也是如此。學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要做一個(gè)小小的評(píng)講,對(duì)畫(huà)得認(rèn)真的同學(xué)要進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng),并適當(dāng)給予幾個(gè)人鼓勵(lì),發(fā)個(gè)小貼畫(huà)等。教學(xué)活動(dòng)2

Move it and say it.教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。在說(shuō)唱的時(shí)候,如果教師把蘋(píng)果、橘子和鴨梨擺在桌上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)就比較容易。比如,先擺好蘋(píng)果,橘子和鴨梨,教師讓學(xué)生說(shuō),apple, orange, pear,然后教師馬上把橘子擺在蘋(píng)果的前面,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),orange,apple,pear,緊接著,教師再拿下橘子換上蘋(píng)果,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),banana,apple, pear.如果教師覺(jué)得這個(gè)比較費(fèi)事,可以將這些圖實(shí)現(xiàn)畫(huà)在 員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 一張大紙上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)也可以。在什么教具都沒(méi)有準(zhǔn)備的情況下,教師就用本單元的圖,也可以讓學(xué)生直接看著圖來(lái)說(shuō)。教師做教具的目的是使大家的視線比較集中,注意力比較集中,同時(shí)也給學(xué)生一個(gè)新的視覺(jué)。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)3

Guess the fruit.在讓大家說(shuō)水果的時(shí)候,教師也可以用猜的方式來(lái)讓學(xué)生猜是什么水果。教師將一個(gè)水果拿在手里放在講臺(tái)桌后面,讓學(xué)生猜,What?s in my hand ? Is it a pear?等。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)4

Draw the fruit.教師讓學(xué)生認(rèn)真閱讀教材上所給的句子,按照要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。同樣,在學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要組織講評(píng),評(píng)比,看哪位同學(xué)畫(huà)的好。在學(xué)生畫(huà)完教材上的畫(huà)以后,如果有時(shí)間,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行畫(huà)畫(huà)比賽。讓每組一個(gè)同學(xué)到黑板前,教師給指令,學(xué)生根據(jù)要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。比如,教師說(shuō),Please draw a tree.Draw one ball under the tree and one ball on the tree.Please draw a fish between the two flowers.Please draw an apple next to the pear.畫(huà)的時(shí)間長(zhǎng)短由老師來(lái)控制。但不宜太長(zhǎng),一般不要超過(guò)5分鐘的時(shí)間,然后轉(zhuǎn)入下一個(gè)活動(dòng)。此練習(xí)可以和本單元練習(xí)2相結(jié)合。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5 Chant it!教師首先拿出Oo字母的圖片,讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)這個(gè)字母的讀音,讀過(guò)幾遍之后,教師可往句子上引導(dǎo),教師可以引導(dǎo)學(xué)生說(shuō),O O O , O O O.Early in the morning, cocks crow.O O O , O O O.Day time again.It?s time to go.在學(xué)生反復(fù)練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分組,集體,個(gè)人朗讀。最后比賽看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得好。然后,教師拿出復(fù)活節(jié)的彩蛋。教師只對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Easter Day is a holiday in

America.It?s on March 21st.教師可以告訴學(xué)生Easter Day 是復(fù)活節(jié)的意思,Easter egg 是把蛋涂成彩色,或直接用巧克力做成。其余 Listen and tick.教師首先讓學(xué)生看這六張圖,然后依次問(wèn)學(xué)生What?s this ? 如碰到有學(xué)生不會(huì)的,教師要多帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生讀幾遍,并且熟悉它們的發(fā)音。然后再讓大家聽(tīng)錄音并判斷是打?qū)€是差。最后教師再?gòu)?qiáng)調(diào)一下house, horse, mouse, mouth的發(fā)音,讓大家注意看口型。課后作業(yè):

Draw three things and write their English word under each picture.任意畫(huà)三種東西,并在下面寫(xiě)上英語(yǔ)。

unit16 I can see it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用I can see......的句型,并能做簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)答 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)有關(guān)動(dòng)物的詞匯

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Pp及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/ 交際句型:I

can

see

a dog What

can you

see? Can you

see the monkeys?

Yes,I

can.No,I

can?t.交際詞匯:rabbit , snake, bird, fish ,mouse, cat, dog, monkey 具體教學(xué)方法: 上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Today we are going to do something.I?m sure you like it.Now ,everybody have a piece of paper.如果教師沒(méi)有帶紙時(shí),則說(shuō),Now ,please take out a piece of

paper, like this.示意給學(xué)生看。Do as I do.Roll ,roll up the paper.Got that ? Let?s do it again.Roll ,roll up the paper.這時(shí),教師邊自己卷紙邊讓學(xué)生跟著做,可以反復(fù)多次,并讓學(xué)生練習(xí)說(shuō),同時(shí)還將許多圖片或玩具放在黑板前的左側(cè),自己站在黑板的右側(cè),用卷起的紙筒邊看邊說(shuō)Roll ,roll up the paper。做完第一個(gè)動(dòng)作之后,教師接著示范第二個(gè)動(dòng)作,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),舉起一個(gè)小狗玩具,這時(shí)教師說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a dog.然后讓該同學(xué)舉起另一個(gè)玩具,這樣以此類(lèi)推。教師示范完之后,讓學(xué)生一起來(lái)認(rèn)讀這些動(dòng)物的名稱(chēng),數(shù)遍之后,教師找學(xué)生拿著紙筒站到教室的后半部,同時(shí)找另一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面為后面的同學(xué)舉圖片或?qū)嵨铮?wèn)后面的學(xué)生,What can you see ?后面的學(xué)生回答說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a eraser.幾分鐘后,教師再讓學(xué)生打開(kāi)書(shū),說(shuō),Now ,please open your books let?s read.讀第4部分,教師可以有意識(shí)把這段 Unit 16 and read with the tape.聽(tīng)第16單元的第4和第5部分,并跟著朗讀。

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/ 鹿胎膏哪個(gè)牌子好 http://lu.dsyd.cn/

員工自評(píng)范文 http://game.dsyd.cn/

第四篇:劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)教案

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)教案

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)(A)Unit 1 Greetings

一、Teaching aims and demands: 1)can use simple English greet others 2)can say“Good morning!” “Good afternoon “Good evening” 3)Can read the new words about letter A a 4)can speak out the sentences of part 7

二、Important and difficult points: What‘s this? It’s the letter Aa.Good morning!Good afternoon!Good evening.Hello!Hi!Slide

三、Teaching Steps : Step1 Greetings:

Good morning /afternoon!Boys and girls how are you today? ……

Ask one student to stand up and say Hello to him or her.and encourage him or her to answer “hello!” Then ask some other students to practice this sentence.Step 2:Call their names and say hello to them.Hello Ming Ming Hello, Dan Dan.Hello Fang Fang …… Step 3: Presentation Show the students some pictures about morning and ask, what’s the picture say?----Morning, Yes, its morning teach the new word.Then show another picture and then teach the word afternoon and the same way to the word evening.Step 4: After learning the short sentences, we will learn an English song, teach the song and practice in groups or in pairs Step 5: show a model slide(this is a slide, what does it like? Yes, it likes the letter Aa).Write the letter Aa on the blackboard and teach the letter A a A is the slide, Slide on the A a.Step 6 teach the words about the letter A a : ape ace alien then practice some times.Step 7 Teach them how to write letter Aa Step 8 :Do some exercises 1)Do the exercises on page 4 of the students’ book 2)match them 3)Good morning Hello!Good night.Good afternoon.Good evening.Good morning.Hello!Good night.Good afternoon!Good evening.劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上Unit 2 who is the first

一、Teaching aims and demands : *They can understand some simple actions and do it;*They can do “Stand up “”Sit down”,” Come here “, “Go back “., * Can understand the meaning of “up “and “”down”.*Can read B b and some new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 5

二、Important and difficult points What’s this? Stand up.Sit down.Come here.Go back Hands pens pencils feet cat snail back bee ball beef

三、teaching method: 本單元的教學(xué)重點(diǎn)是游戲,通過(guò)大家一起做動(dòng)作來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ),也就是我們常說(shuō)的,“玩中學(xué),學(xué)中玩”。教師一到課堂里就可以邊做手勢(shì)邊說(shuō),Now ,stand up ,sit down, Stand up!sit down.說(shuō)的時(shí)候可以先慢后快,也可以讓學(xué)生無(wú)法預(yù)料。大家基本上不出什么錯(cuò)誤的時(shí)候,教師就可以跑到教室的后面叫一個(gè)同學(xué)說(shuō),Come here!Come here!等到學(xué)生來(lái)了之后,教師可以說(shuō)Go back.Go back.Go back.然后再叫另外的同學(xué),在這四個(gè)句子中來(lái)回變換花樣,最好是時(shí)常有所變化。等大家熟悉了以后,、讓大家一起來(lái)說(shuō)順口溜,Up, Up, stand up.Down, down, sit down.Here, here, come here.Back ,back, go back.邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。然后教師開(kāi)始用實(shí)物來(lái)做替換練習(xí)。如,Hands up!Hands down.Hands up, hands down.Books up.Books down.等等。

當(dāng)大家累了的時(shí)候,就讓大家休息一下,來(lái)給圖畫(huà)著色。著色之后再讓大家相互觀看,看誰(shuí)色彩上的好。接下來(lái)便是教字母的時(shí)間。教師首先讓學(xué)生們看兩個(gè)字母的卡片或形象的圖片(貓和蝸牛)。邊看大寫(xiě)B(tài)的時(shí)候,邊說(shuō)Big B is a cat.然后拿小寫(xiě)b說(shuō),Small b is a snail.The cat and the snail.They are the letter Bb,等.讓大家反復(fù)說(shuō),反復(fù)練習(xí),然后,讓小組的同學(xué)進(jìn)行朗誦比賽,看看哪個(gè)組最好。在學(xué)字母的時(shí)候,注意把這幾個(gè)詞給學(xué)生,讓他們練習(xí)一下。其中還有:bee, ball, beet字母組合等。在適當(dāng)?shù)臅r(shí)候,讓學(xué)生放松一下,可以隨時(shí)讓他們做一些動(dòng)作,即復(fù)習(xí)了所學(xué)內(nèi)容,有有助于學(xué)生上課保持新鮮感,更有興趣參與到學(xué)習(xí)中來(lái)。請(qǐng)一個(gè)學(xué)生到講臺(tái)上去做動(dòng)作,其他同學(xué)在下面說(shuō)他做的動(dòng)作,看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得最快最準(zhǔn)確,老師可適當(dāng)給予獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。然后再換其他同學(xué)去,做到充分練習(xí)。四、Exercises : 1.Read and do: Stand up.Sit down.Come here Go back pen up.Pencil down Books up.Feed down…… 2.Let’s chant

A.Up, up, stand up.Down, down,sit down.Here, here, come here.Back, back, go back.Up, up, stand up.Down, down, sit down Up, up, books up.Down down pencils down.Up up pens up, down down feet down.B Good morning, mummy!Good morning, daddy!Good afternoon, teacher!Good evening, my little cat!C.Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pen down!Two, two, two books up!One, one, one pencil down!

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上 Unit 3 Catch and run

一、Teaching aims and demands: *Can understand some simple actions and do it *Know the meaning of “catch、run.”

*Can read and write letter Bb and can read the new words about Bb *Can read the sentences of part 7 on page 11

二、Important and difficult points: catch!Run to the …… door table window boys girls blackboard teacher flowers cab cap

三、Teaching method and steps: Step1:Bring some toys to the classroom at the beginning of the class, throw them to the classes one by one and say: Catch!If they can understand what’s meaning, take out the pictures show to them and teach the new words: ball, door, window, blackboard, teacher, flowers Step2: Go to the playground play games and learn: Please be ready.Run!Group them into boys and girls.Have a rally race.Then queue in a line, do some actions(Who is the fastest): Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Then chant it and do it: Catch a ball, run to the door.Catch a pen, run to Ben.Catch a pencil, run to the middle.Catch, run, catch, run, catch and run.Step3:Go back to the classroom, have a rest, then color it on page 12.then listen and circles on page 12 Step4:take a piece of paper and ask them ?What’s this ?It’s a piece of paper ,yes ,now cut it into a shape of big moon ,and then ask :What’s this now ?---Yes ,it’s moon.What does it look like ike a smiling face , like the letter C c.Who said it likes letter C c ,will be prized.Say: c is the moon, C c is the moon.We are on the moon, we are on the moon.Step5: Show them pictures and teach: cab, cap, and cat.Can add some words about Cc.Step6: Teach them how to write letter Cc.Step7: Exercises: Speak out and do actions: Run to the door!Run to the table!Run to the window!Run to the teacher!Run to the flowers!Stand!Sit!Catch!Run!Ask and answer in pairs: What’s this? It’s a big C.What’s this? It’s a small c.Practice reading and writing letter C c

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上 Unit 4 Color it green

一、Teaching aims and demands: *can understand and speak out the words about some colors *they can do color the things after the order *使學(xué)生能用兩種問(wèn)句問(wèn)問(wèn)題

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分和練習(xí)1中所給的句子和單詞

二、交際句型: Color it green.What color do you like? Which is the blue duck?

三、交際詞匯: pink, green, indigo, red, yellow, purple

四、具體教學(xué)方法:

可以首先拿出一只剪好的白色鴨子對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),This is a duck.This is a duck.I have many ducks.Look, one, two, three, four and five.They are white.Do you know“white”? Now , this is indigo.This is red.教師拿出兩種顏色給學(xué)生看。接著教師用剛才的鴨子舉例,說(shuō),Look here,this is a white duck.This is a indigo duck.Now, look, I have many ducks on the blackboard.What color are they? This is a white duck, this is a indigo duck.從剛才新教的詞匯開(kāi)始,然后再教新的顏色詞,每教一個(gè)新詞之前要復(fù)習(xí)一下剛學(xué)過(guò)的詞,可以將鴨子貼在黑板上,下面再貼上與鴨子顏色一樣的光電紙,然后,教師指著鴨子說(shuō),This is a duck.It's blue.It's a blue duck.然后教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can say the sentences about these ducks?鼓勵(lì)同學(xué)們到前面來(lái)描述。當(dāng)一兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)完之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

接下來(lái),教師選出一些漂亮、鮮艷的顏色,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),I've got lots of colors.What color do you like? 問(wèn)不同的同學(xué),如果該學(xué)生說(shuō),I like green.教師就給該生一個(gè)綠色的小蘋(píng)果(事先剪好不同顏色的蘋(píng)果或其它圖案)

教師教字母D d的時(shí)候,可以直接拿出D字母,然后再拿出帶有豎琴的圖片進(jìn)行比較,同時(shí)帶著大家一起說(shuō),Big D is a harp.Small d is a chair.The girl is sitting on the chair, playing the harp.教師邊說(shuō)邊指著圖片和字母Dd.接著教師說(shuō),Look here.What’s this? It’s a dog.D-dog.What's this? It’s a doll.D-doll.教師帶著大家朗讀D字母音的同時(shí),可以帶出的讀音,并讓學(xué)生看圖片。

在做練習(xí)的時(shí)候,教師引導(dǎo)大家看畫(huà)有彩虹的圖。教師可以說(shuō),Look, we've got a nice rainbow on page 16.This is a rainbow.It has seven colors.Let's see.What color are they? 這時(shí)教師啟發(fā)學(xué)生說(shuō)出這七種顏色。

在做練習(xí)3時(shí),教師先讓大家把圖涂上顏色,然后可以在全班進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)涂色涂的最好。具體操作如下:教師可以讓學(xué)生一行一行地拿著自己的課本到前面來(lái),大家進(jìn)行推薦。最后表彰前十名同學(xué)。

五、課后作業(yè):

一、.Draw five ducks with different colors and write each color next to the duck.辨認(rèn)dog doll door

二、.Read and draw: 1)A cat, 2)Flowers 3)A cap.4)A dog.三、.Write down the words which have letter “D d”.door cat boy doll duck blue pink red yellow color dog green pencil indigo ace _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上 Unit 5 Let’s play

一、Teaching aims and demands * 使學(xué)生能正確地做出向右轉(zhuǎn),向左轉(zhuǎn)的動(dòng)作 * 讓學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)出拍手歌歌謠

* 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ee 及所給單詞的讀音 * 使學(xué)生能讀出第四部分所給出的句子

二、交際句型:Turn right Turn left Hold your hands and stand in a circle You have one, I have one.Two little children see a big man.三、交際詞匯: one ,two ,three ,four ,five ,a boy ,four boys ,a girl ,four girls

四、教學(xué)用具:蘋(píng)果,梨,香蕉,帽子的有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨镒帜傅拇笮?xiě)及單詞讀音圖片。

五、具體教學(xué)方式: 教師上課時(shí),先讓學(xué)生做一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)作,比如,Stand in two lines.Turn right.Turn left.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這些句子的時(shí)候,幫他們完成動(dòng)作,以至于讓他們理解這幾句話的意思然后,集體一起說(shuō)課文的第2部分。當(dāng)學(xué)生能較熟練地說(shuō)這些內(nèi)容以后,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行表演,邊表演邊說(shuō)。這里教師特別要注意全班同學(xué)的整體性,不要讓任何人掉隊(duì)。所以,練習(xí)的遍數(shù)要多,人員要普遍,不要留死角。換句話說(shuō),全班的每一個(gè)人要有充分的練習(xí)時(shí)間。在做這部分的時(shí)候,讓所有的學(xué)生都參與到這個(gè)活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái),在游戲活動(dòng)當(dāng)中來(lái)領(lǐng)略新的知識(shí)。

在學(xué)習(xí)完第1,2部分后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家進(jìn)行單,復(fù)數(shù)概念的練習(xí),由于是初次與學(xué)生見(jiàn)面,所以教師只通過(guò)數(shù)數(shù)的方式,讓學(xué)生知道1~5的含義就可以了,至于說(shuō)a boy , four boys , a girl ,four girls ,也只是讓學(xué)生知道有變化而已。

在學(xué)習(xí)字母E e的時(shí)候,教師首先拿出字母E e卡片,然后再引導(dǎo)學(xué)生看教材的Ee字母的變形圖。同時(shí)帶領(lǐng)大家一起說(shuō),Big E is for sail ,small e is for whale.The ship has a sail, sailing behind the whale.教師說(shuō)此段內(nèi)容時(shí),可以用節(jié)奏的方式說(shuō),并讓學(xué)生拍著節(jié)奏說(shuō)。經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)邊的練習(xí),然后進(jìn)行組與組之間的比賽。在學(xué)生大聲朗讀之后,教師可以帶領(lǐng)大家學(xué)習(xí)字母組合的讀音。首先教師強(qiáng)調(diào)的讀音,然后直接以拼音的方式拼出單詞即可。比如,b—e-e=bee ,f—e-e—t=feet等,教師只要帶領(lǐng)拼讀就行了。

六、教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and act 上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK , everyone.Stand up.Sit down.Stand up.Turn right.Turn left.Stand in two lines.Hold your hands and stand in a circle.在說(shuō)這部分的內(nèi)容的時(shí)候,教師一定要伴隨一定的動(dòng)作,不然學(xué)生不會(huì)理解,也不會(huì)去做動(dòng)作,Hands up , one ,two(拍手)Hands down , one, two(拍手).Hands right, one , two(拍手)Hands left , one two(拍手)。做這個(gè)活動(dòng)時(shí),教師可以先由慢再逐漸加快,特別是說(shuō),hands up ,one ,two 的時(shí)候可以快一些,讓整個(gè)的句子富有節(jié)奏感。教學(xué)活動(dòng) 2 pat-a-cake 教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)此段歌謠的最后方法是兩個(gè)人一組,一邊拍手,一邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)的句子。甚至教師在拍手的空隙間可以加進(jìn)一個(gè)動(dòng)作(比如,高大的人,上學(xué),種樹(shù)等動(dòng)作)。在大家熟練的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還可以讓同學(xué)們之間進(jìn)行比賽,比拍手的協(xié)調(diào)性及英語(yǔ)句字的準(zhǔn)確性等。在用英語(yǔ)教學(xué)時(shí),教師只需簡(jiǎn)單講一下即可。如,now ,everyone , let’s play Pat-a-cake.Do you know? Let `s try it.You have one, I have one, two little children see a big man.Do you understand? Let `s do it in pairs.First you do it after me.Ready? Let `s start.教學(xué)活動(dòng) 3 Color it!

教師上課前復(fù)印好若干張黑白圖片。上課時(shí),讓學(xué)生著色比賽。黑板圖片的選擇可以是自行畫(huà)的,也可以從某教材中復(fù)印下來(lái),但筆畫(huà)不宜太多太難。

七、課后作業(yè)

與爸爸媽媽一起說(shuō)拍手歌。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit6 Hide and seek 教學(xué)目的和要求

* 使學(xué)生通過(guò)游戲活動(dòng)培養(yǎng)對(duì)英語(yǔ)的興趣 * 使學(xué)生初步掌握簡(jiǎn)單的指令 * 使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉所學(xué)的顏色 * 使學(xué)生掌握字母及相關(guān)單詞的讀音 交際句型:Show me your book , please.Here you are Quick!Hide your pencil.Where is it ? 交際詞匯: Pencil, crayon , eraser ,behind my back , in the desk 教學(xué)用具:鉛筆,橡皮,蠟筆,書(shū),書(shū)包,圖片及實(shí)物 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師上課時(shí)首先拿給學(xué)生們看一件較新鮮的東西。教師說(shuō),Look!I’ve got something in my bag.Ah,here it is.這時(shí)教師拿出一件特殊的玩具,讓學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Let me show you another thing.Look,here it is.Is it good? 學(xué)生看完之后,教師又說(shuō),Look ,let me show you my new pen.This is my pen.It’s new.說(shuō)到此,教師突然問(wèn),Li Ming , have you got a pen ?Show me your pen , please.(講此話時(shí),教師一定要用手勢(shì))Wang Fang, show me your book, please.Thank you.Now, everybody, practice it in pairs.You say ,Show me your pencil , please.’教師邊說(shuō)邊給出節(jié)奏,這樣,學(xué)生就容易上口。

在教本單元時(shí)教師不要太性急,特別是前面的幾部分,教師要一部分一部分地進(jìn)行。比如,教師說(shuō),Now hide your pencil.Quick!Hide your pencil 然后教師去找.Ah ,here.Ah , in the desk.Ah, behind your back 等等。然后,教師再對(duì)大家說(shuō),.Now hide your book!Hide your book.接著教師又開(kāi)始找,然后再說(shuō),Hide your pen.Hide your eraser.等等。

進(jìn)行第二步驟時(shí),教師說(shuō),Who can come here and hide my book?等到學(xué)生藏好以后,教師說(shuō)Where is it? Where is it?邊說(shuō)邊找。接下來(lái),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, now, let’s play a game ,Who wants to be here?當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)后,教師讓他/她閉上眼睛,或者面對(duì)黑板,然后讓某個(gè)人把東西藏起來(lái).藏好后教師讓這個(gè)學(xué)生問(wèn)OK ,where ’s the pencil ? where’s it? 大家一起說(shuō),There it is!There it is!教師帶領(lǐng)大家做這個(gè)游戲時(shí),應(yīng)該練習(xí)說(shuō)第4部分的內(nèi)容。

大家活動(dòng)了一會(huì)兒后,教師拿出字母卡片,讓大家跟讀發(fā)音,同時(shí)給出幾個(gè)詞,如,(課文中出現(xiàn)的)face ,flag ,foot.并讓大家看跳臺(tái),同時(shí)說(shuō)出該段的順口溜-----Diving-platform, diving-platform ,Ff is the diving-platform, Boys are diving ,girls aye diving ,Ff is the diving-platform.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Listen and point 教師首先不讓同學(xué)們看書(shū),而是問(wèn)大家Where is the door?大家用手指門(mén).Where is the TV? Where is the table? Where is the blackboard? Where is …? Where are the windows?等等.大家對(duì)這個(gè)句型了解了之后,教師再讓大家打開(kāi)書(shū),聽(tīng)錄音, 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Colour it!教師讓大家準(zhǔn)備好彩色筆,然后將本單元第6部分的圖片上色,但要規(guī)定時(shí)間,教師可這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)Now , everyone ,pleas take out your crayons.let’s colour the pictures on page 22.We ‘ve got eight pictures.You have 3 minutes(教師指表)Let’s see who is the first and whose pictures are the best.Now ,are you ready? Start!教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 LISTEN and circle 在學(xué)習(xí)完了第7部分的內(nèi)容之后,教師可以安排聽(tīng)力內(nèi)容.練習(xí)2的答案是:1(d)2(b)3(c)4 課后作業(yè)

每人回家在紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩,男孩,女孩都可以,并給孩子取個(gè)名字。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit7 Point to your nose.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)人體面部的各個(gè)部位 *使學(xué)生能清楚地辨認(rèn)人體的主要部位

*使學(xué)生初步掌握I have …This is… There are…的句型 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Gg及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:

What’s this? It’s a nose.What are these ? They’re eyes.Point to your nose.This is my mouth.These are my feet.I have two ears.交際詞匯:Nose, mouth , face, eyes, teeth, feet, hands, legs, arms, hair 教學(xué)用具:教學(xué)圖片(人身體的各個(gè)部位)娃娃兩個(gè)(男女各一個(gè))具體教學(xué)方式: 上課時(shí),教師先拿一個(gè)布娃娃開(kāi)始,教師說(shuō),Look ,I’ve got a beautiful girl.Her name is Mary.She’s 6 years old.Now ,let’s see.This is her face , nose and mouth..These are her eyes, ears and teeth.Now follow me ,face ,nose ,mouth ,eyes ,ears ,teeth.Now ,who wants to come here and show us her face ?Very good.Now you say each part and everybody follows you.(這時(shí)讓全班同學(xué)跟他一起說(shuō)。)重復(fù)類(lèi)似幾遍之后,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, listen and act.Point to your nose.Point to your face ,point to your mouth.point to your eyes.point to your ears.point to your teeth.教師在做此活動(dòng)時(shí),可以采取不同的形式。比如,教師說(shuō),全班同學(xué)一起做;也可以采取同桌的同學(xué)一個(gè)人說(shuō),一個(gè)人做;也可以找一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面給指令,大家一起做。總之,教學(xué)的目的是讓大家盡快熟悉所學(xué)的單詞和句型。

接下來(lái),教師可以組織大家一起玩Simon says的游戲。教師說(shuō),Simon says,Touch your face.touch your nose.Simon says,Touch your ears.等游戲之后,教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生學(xué)習(xí)本單元的第3部分。說(shuō)這一部分的時(shí)候,教師要帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起邊說(shuō)邊做,由慢到快,最好還有節(jié)奏。這樣,同學(xué)能夠很快的掌握此段內(nèi)容。

在大家說(shuō)的比較多的情況下,教師可以給出I Have…的句型。教師首先講I have two eyes.I have a nose.I have two ears.I have a mouth.I have many teeth.I have black hair.起初,學(xué)生并不知道have是什么意思,教師只需在黑板上寫(xiě)有,而不需整句話進(jìn)行翻譯。然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例,I have a face.I have a mouth.I have two ears.I have two eyes等等。教師說(shuō)完之后,馬上找一兩個(gè)同學(xué)復(fù)述,最后再讓全班同學(xué)兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí)。

在個(gè)人和集體練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師再帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起活動(dòng)做練習(xí)5,教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Ok, everybody ,let’s do a game.Stand up pleas!Everybody!Follow me.Head ,head, touch your head…(按照課文的內(nèi)容把動(dòng)作做完)如果大家做的好,紀(jì)律也比較好,接著做第4部分的Chant it.這也要求邊說(shuō)邊做動(dòng)作。教師要特別注意,學(xué)生不僅要會(huì)做動(dòng)作,更重要的是會(huì)說(shuō)每一句話。所以盡量多練習(xí),反復(fù)練習(xí)。在大家說(shuō)的比較多,感到比較累的時(shí)候,教師接著進(jìn)行字母教學(xué)。教師可以先示范,拿著字母G g說(shuō),This is G g.Yes, it’s G g(重復(fù)幾遍)。在學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō),逐漸會(huì)了的情況下,教師自然帶出順口溜。Mum is a big G.A baby’s on a small g.Mum and the baby ,they are very happy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)1Listen and touch 教師自己可以在一張紙上畫(huà)一個(gè)大兔子。上課時(shí),將兔子的圖掛在黑板上,讓兩個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),聽(tīng)指令,做動(dòng)作,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)動(dòng)作快,動(dòng)作慢的同學(xué)回座位,再換另一個(gè)人。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),look ,I’ve got a big rabbit here.I’ m putting this on the blackboard.I want two pupils to come to the front.I say ‘ear’, they touch the ear.I say `mouth’ ,they touch the mouth, do you understand ?Who wants to come here? Good , Let’s begin.Nose ,… 教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Chanting match 教師教完第4部分之后,讓同學(xué)們進(jìn)行說(shuō)唱比賽可以采取男生和女生分開(kāi)的方式,也可以采取一組一組的方式。看看哪個(gè)組說(shuō)得做得最好。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 教師在黑板上畫(huà)一個(gè)沒(méi)有鼻子的孩子,然后,讓學(xué)生上來(lái)給這個(gè)孩子貼鼻子。教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)用紙畫(huà)好,剪好的鼻子。上來(lái)的同學(xué)要離黑板有一定的距離。教師要用布將孩子的眼睛蒙住,然后讓學(xué)生轉(zhuǎn)兩個(gè)圈,再開(kāi)始貼鼻子,看哪個(gè)同學(xué)貼的位置最準(zhǔn)確。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, we’ve got a boy here ,but he has no nose.(手勢(shì))Who can come here and put the nose on his face? 等同學(xué)上來(lái)之后,教師說(shuō)Good, but we have to cover your eyes.You have to turn around twice.Ok., go and stick the nose on the boy.教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Draw and show 上節(jié)課結(jié)束的時(shí)候,教師給大家留了一個(gè)作業(yè),讓每個(gè)人回家畫(huà)一個(gè)小孩。這一次,教師利用上課的機(jī)會(huì)進(jìn)行點(diǎn)評(píng)。首先,教師在黑板前拴上一個(gè)線繩,然后讓孩子把圖片用曲別針掛在線繩上,最后讓全班同學(xué)進(jìn)行評(píng)比,看看哪個(gè)同學(xué)畫(huà)的最好。然后,教師給予一定獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)。通常獎(jiǎng)勵(lì)的人數(shù)應(yīng)盡量達(dá)到四分之一,這樣,孩子感到稍加努力,都能得到獎(jiǎng)品。課后作業(yè):

Draw an animal of any kind and write down its nose ,mouth, ears ,teeth ,etc.(在一張紙上畫(huà)任何一種動(dòng)物,并用英語(yǔ)寫(xiě)上那兒是鼻子,嘴。耳朵,牙齒等。)

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit8 How many doors? 1使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步熟悉1`5的數(shù)字 2 使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)6~10的數(shù)字 3 使學(xué)生加深對(duì)單`復(fù)數(shù)的概念 使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母及所給單詞的讀音 使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型: How many doors? It’s a book.This is Hh.It’s letter H h

交際詞匯: One…ten, orange ,pear, apple, banana ,door, window , chair, TV ,book , pen ,pencile 教學(xué)用具:1~10的單詞卡,有關(guān)圖片或?qū)嵨铮〔伎诖瑥椙蛉舾蓚€(gè)。小獎(jiǎng)品,字母的大小寫(xiě)及掛圖的圖片。具體教學(xué)方式:

首先教師拿1~10的數(shù)字讓學(xué)生看,同時(shí)教師用英語(yǔ)發(fā)每個(gè)數(shù)字的讀音,然后教師讓大家跟著一起說(shuō)這些數(shù)子。教師也可以拿一些書(shū)本來(lái)數(shù),邊數(shù)邊說(shuō)。講復(fù)數(shù)概念的時(shí)候,教師只需先拿起一本書(shū),說(shuō)a book,然后再拿起一本書(shū),把兩本書(shū)放在一起時(shí)說(shuō),two books教師特別要強(qiáng)調(diào)的發(fā)音,以便引起學(xué)生的注意。然后,教師繼續(xù)舉例說(shuō)a desk, two desks ,a table,two tables ,a door, two doors, a pen ,two pens, a pencil, two pencils等。教師舉例之后,馬上讓學(xué)生來(lái)說(shuō),教師說(shuō)第一部分,讓學(xué)生說(shuō)第2部分。比如,教師說(shuō)a book,并馬上把兩本書(shū)放在一起,示意大家說(shuō),two books,…大家熟悉了復(fù)數(shù)的概念時(shí),教師就可以引入課文中的內(nèi)容。,比如one orange ,two pears, three apples ,four bananas如果有實(shí)物或圖,就用實(shí)物或圖來(lái)說(shuō)明。最后帶著大家一起認(rèn)讀。

接著,教師可以采取的教學(xué)活動(dòng)進(jìn)一步帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生辨認(rèn)這些詞。教師說(shuō)一個(gè)詞,讓學(xué)生迅速用手指出來(lái)。比如,學(xué)生馬上就指,教師的語(yǔ)速也可以由慢到快。其次,教師帶領(lǐng)大家一起做第2部分練習(xí)。首先,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組自己做。教師這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō)學(xué)生做了一會(huì)兒以后,教師說(shuō),如果大家回答的很順利,教師讓大家看第4部分。還是先兩人一組練習(xí),然后,一組一組的進(jìn)行對(duì)話問(wèn)答。本單元第5 部分是讓學(xué)生自己畫(huà)畫(huà),教師應(yīng)該給學(xué)生規(guī)定時(shí)間,看那個(gè)同學(xué)在最短的時(shí)間內(nèi)畫(huà)出最好的的香蕉和蘋(píng)果。注意,教師進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)時(shí),應(yīng)只表?yè)P(yáng)畫(huà)一個(gè)蘋(píng)果和一個(gè)香蕉的同學(xué),同時(shí)要提醒畫(huà)的多的同學(xué)認(rèn)真看文字要求

本單元第7 部分是學(xué)習(xí)字母部分,教師可以先讓同學(xué)們看掛圖,讓大家猜掛圖畫(huà)的是什么,如果大家說(shuō)出是樹(shù)和房子時(shí),教師拿出字母卡,讓大家進(jìn)行比較,順便引出順口溜。教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 教師事先準(zhǔn)備好一個(gè)小布袋,里面裝有一些玻璃球。劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit9 Tell your friends.*使學(xué)生能向別人做簡(jiǎn)單的自我介紹 *使學(xué)生初步學(xué)會(huì)使用I’m的句型

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ii及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第5部分所給出的句子 交際句型:I'm Dongdong.I'm six.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.交際詞匯:boy ,toy, car, girl , doll 具體教學(xué)方式:

教師首先用一個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做自我介紹,教師可以藏在布娃娃的后面,模仿小娃娃的的說(shuō)話聲,說(shuō),Hello, My name is Mary.I'm Mary.I'm six.I'm a girl.I like dolls.當(dāng)說(shuō)到dolls的時(shí)候,教師應(yīng)拿起兩個(gè)其他的布娃娃,放在該娃娃的手里。然后,教師再重復(fù)一遍。說(shuō)完之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who can come here and say like this ?教師找一個(gè)或兩個(gè)同學(xué)到前面說(shuō)之后,讓大家再聽(tīng)第二段。Very good,now,listen to me.I have another friend.His name is Tom.說(shuō)到此教師拿起第二個(gè)娃娃,說(shuō),Hello, I'm Tom.I'm seven.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.說(shuō)完之后,教師重復(fù)一遍。然后,繼續(xù)讓兩三個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái)說(shuō)這個(gè)Tom。在大家都知道內(nèi)容的情況下,教師對(duì)同學(xué)說(shuō),Now you know my friends already.Who can come here and talk about yourself.Who wants to try?You can say, I'm ***教師舉班上一個(gè)人名為例,I'm 7.I'm a boy.I like toy cars.Who wants to try? Very good.Come here!等兩三個(gè)學(xué)生結(jié)束后,教師對(duì)全班說(shuō),now, practise it in pairs.在學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分別向五個(gè)學(xué)生介紹自己,并且加上Hello,Good morning.I'm...最后再說(shuō),Goodbye!這樣通過(guò)大量的練習(xí),使學(xué)生能在課堂就掌握這句型。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Unit 10 three times.劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit10 Let's do it.*使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂用英語(yǔ)說(shuō)的簡(jiǎn)單指令 *使學(xué)生能進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)文具用品

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Jj及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Put the ruler in your hand.This is a ruler.That is a crayon.交際詞匯:book, pencil-box,crayon, ruler, window, door, boy, girl.具體教學(xué)方式:

在前面的幾個(gè)單元中,我們都先后學(xué)習(xí)了一些文具用品的單詞,但本單元的重點(diǎn)在于復(fù)習(xí)這些文具用品的單詞,并能了解一些介詞的基本位置,如,in , on ,under ,between及next to,并圍繞介詞來(lái)開(kāi)展一些活動(dòng)。上課開(kāi)始時(shí),教師可以拿著已經(jīng)熟悉的文具問(wèn)學(xué)生們,What's this ?What's that?當(dāng)學(xué)生熟悉這些單詞后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)一起做動(dòng)作。教師說(shuō),Put the book on your hand.讓大家馬上做動(dòng)作,然后,教師接著說(shuō),Put the ruler in your hand.Put the book under your chair.除了這三句話以外,教師還可以說(shuō),Put your book in your bag.Put the pencil in your pencil-box.Put the book between the two pencils.Put the crayon next to the book.等 教師做這些動(dòng)作時(shí),讓學(xué)生跟著一起模仿,而不要一上課就給學(xué)生解釋什么是介詞。做完一遍動(dòng)作后,教師還可以繼續(xù)用別的句子來(lái)鞏固剛才所練習(xí)的內(nèi)容,比如,Put the pen on your desk.Put the book in your hand.等。然后教師用一個(gè)乒乓球和一個(gè)粉筆盒給學(xué)生單個(gè)示范,The ball is on the box.The ball is in the box.The ball is under the box.The ball is between the two boxes.The ball is next to the box.Put the ball behind the box.在教師解釋的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓每個(gè)人都拿著一支鉛筆跟老師一起說(shuō)、一起做。經(jīng)過(guò)數(shù)遍的練習(xí)后,教師要讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行描述,最后選幾個(gè)人在全班進(jìn)行描述。

此外,還可以進(jìn)行其它教學(xué)活動(dòng)。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the chant in the next Unit and say it with the tape.預(yù)習(xí)下單元中的說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit11 Let's guess.*使學(xué)生能掌握簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)句What's in the bag? Where's the bird? *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)和鞏固所學(xué)過(guò)的有關(guān)文具及水果方面的單詞 *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Kk及所給單詞的讀音

*使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:What's in the bag? Where 's the bird? It's on the big K.It's under the small K.交際詞匯:pencil, pen, ruler, bag, apple, pear, banana, boy, girl, teacher 具體教學(xué)方式: 上課時(shí),教師手里拿著一個(gè)盒子,對(duì)大家說(shuō),Look, I've got a box in my hand.Guess, what's in the box ? If your guess is right, I'll give this to you.OK, let's guess what's in the box ?教師讓大家猜的時(shí)候,把It's a...的句型寫(xiě)在黑板上,目的是讓大家反復(fù)運(yùn)用這個(gè)句型。當(dāng)某個(gè)同學(xué)猜到以后,教師就可以把東西送給他/她。接下來(lái),教師再讓大家猜書(shū)包里的東西,還是用同樣的方法。最后,教師再讓學(xué)生猜自己手里、口袋里的東西。通過(guò)這些反復(fù)的猜東西游戲活動(dòng),學(xué)生會(huì)復(fù)習(xí)到許多已學(xué)過(guò)的單詞。

在教師的猜謎語(yǔ)游戲之后,教師讓每個(gè)同學(xué)自己拿一件東西,讓自己的朋友猜,如果能一次猜中的就舉手告訴給教師,教師可以給獎(jiǎng)品。隨后,找一個(gè)同學(xué)拿著自己的東西到前面來(lái)讓大家猜。總之,一開(kāi)始上課教師就要給學(xué)生帶來(lái)一種熱烈的氣氛。

接下來(lái),教師帶著大家一起說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱(課文的第3部分)。教學(xué)活動(dòng) See them all.教師將許多文具用品及部分水果放在一個(gè)書(shū)包里,做游戲時(shí),將所有的東西倒在講桌上。然后,馬上用一張報(bào)紙蓋住。這時(shí)教師叫一個(gè)同學(xué),站在東西前面,教師迅速地讓該同學(xué)看一眼,然后讓該生說(shuō)桌子上有什么。如該生說(shuō)了五個(gè)單詞,就在該生所在組的記錄上寫(xiě)上五,然后找另外一個(gè)組的同學(xué)上來(lái)繼續(xù)看東西,最后看哪個(gè)組同學(xué)記得多。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got many things on the desk.I'll ask one pupil from each group to come here and have a look.Then you tell us what things are on the table.OK?Group One , who wants to come? Good.Now , look!OK, what are they ? 一組之后,教師再叫第二組。課后作業(yè):

Draw five balls and colour each ball with a different colour.用五種不同的顏色畫(huà)五個(gè)不同的球。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit12 Bounce a ball.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)1~10的數(shù)字 *讓學(xué)生進(jìn)一步分清各種顏色

*讓學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用兩個(gè)特殊疑問(wèn)句Who....? Where...? *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Ll及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第7部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Who can bounce a ball? I can bounce the ball.Where's the mouse? It's in the boot.交際詞匯:one....ten,catch, here,small, big ,blue, red, yellow, etc.具體教學(xué)方式:

上課時(shí),教師先拿出一個(gè)乒乓球讓大家看看,Look, I've got a ping pang ball.It's small.But I've also got a big ball.Look.This ball is small.(指小球)This ball is small.It's white.This ball is big.It's brown.I can bounce the ball.Lokk,one ,two, three.教師拍一會(huì)兒球,停住,Who can come here and bounce a ball? 這時(shí)教師請(qǐng)一個(gè)同學(xué)上來(lái)拍球,大家一起數(shù)數(shù)。到10的時(shí)候,教師說(shuō),OK, stop, you're very good.Who else can come here and bounce a ball?(教師再叫一個(gè)同學(xué)到前面來(lái),重復(fù)一遍,然后,教師帶領(lǐng)同學(xué)做下一個(gè)教學(xué)活動(dòng)。)教學(xué)活動(dòng) Throw it and catch it.教師讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái),遞給他們一個(gè)皮球。讓第一個(gè)同學(xué)將球扔給任何一個(gè)同學(xué),扔的時(shí)候要說(shuō),Catch!其他同學(xué)喊Here!Here!凡是扔過(guò)的同學(xué)就自動(dòng)坐下,其余的同學(xué)繼續(xù)扔。直到最后一個(gè)同學(xué)將球傳回給教師。教師可以這樣用英語(yǔ)說(shuō),OK, boys and girls, let's have a ball game.Everybody, stand up ,please.When you throw the ball,you say “Catch”, then you throw the ball to your friend.The others will say,“Here!here!”When you finish, you sit down.Let's see who is the last person.The last person throws the ball back to the teacher again.Understand? OK, let's begin.Catch!教學(xué)活動(dòng) Draw and hang.教師讓學(xué)生每人畫(huà)一個(gè)球,可大、也可小,并涂上顏色,最后,教師讓大家把所有的球都掛在線繩上,讓大家參觀,并評(píng)出十個(gè)最好的球。課后作業(yè): Find a pingpong ball and colour it and bring it to the classroom next time.找一個(gè)乒乓球,把它涂上顏色,看誰(shuí)涂得最好看。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit13 Exercise our body.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生會(huì)說(shuō)一些鍛煉身體的一般用語(yǔ) *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂基本句子并按照要求做動(dòng)作

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Mm及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂和讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Stand in a row.Bend down.Straighten up.Touch the left foot.Right foot up/ down.What's that over there? Is it a big mountain? What are they doing ? They are swimming.Are they happy? Yes, they are.交際詞匯:up, down,front , back, row, line 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Do as the teacher do!本單元的句型比較多,教師要立足于讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂并操練,而不必去講任何的句型。建議:上課的時(shí)候,教師就讓全班同學(xué)站起來(lái)。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK,everyone , listen and do as I do.Stand up!Sit down!Now quickly, let's do it again.重復(fù)起立、坐下的目的是讓大家跟著一起迅速做動(dòng)作,不要拖拖拉拉。教師接著說(shuō) Now listen carefully.Stand in a row.Quickly!In a row.Now listen carefully, stand in a line.In a line.Very good.Listen again.Stand in a row.Stand in a line.Very good.Now stand in three lines.Three lines.(手勢(shì))Follow me.Bend down.Straight up.Touch the left foot.Touch the right foot.Right foot up.Right foot down.Left foot down.Hands up!Hands down 在做這些動(dòng)作的時(shí)候,教師要把這些動(dòng)作反復(fù)的做,知道熟練為止。在教師給指令的基礎(chǔ)上,教師鼓勵(lì)學(xué)生跟著老師一邊說(shuō)一邊做。這樣,學(xué)生能說(shuō)這些基本的句子,在大家都知道如何說(shuō)以后,教師讓學(xué)生一起給指令。這時(shí)候,教師獨(dú)自做動(dòng)作,記住,教師做動(dòng)作只是為了檢查學(xué)生是否熟練掌握了這些基本句型。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Act it in pairs 如果學(xué)生紀(jì)律比較好,教師可以讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí)給指令,做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Listen and do.在做好動(dòng)作的基礎(chǔ)上,讓學(xué)生邊聽(tīng)第2部分的錄音,邊做動(dòng)作。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Colour it!接著,教師可以讓學(xué)生給50頁(yè)上的兩個(gè)孩子上顏色,在上顏色的時(shí),教師要規(guī)定時(shí)間,一般來(lái)說(shuō)三分鐘就可以了,然后馬上檢查哪位學(xué)生涂得好,進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5 Ask and answer.涂好顏色之后,教師可以拿出字母Mm卡片,把它放在稍遠(yuǎn)的地方,然后教師用兩個(gè)布娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話。教師拿其中一個(gè)說(shuō) what's that over there?Is it a big mountain? 拿著另一個(gè)說(shuō)No, it's letter Mm.教師再重復(fù)一遍,試圖讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)懂每一句話。然后教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, let's do the dialogue.I ask you a question.You answer my questions.教師在問(wèn)的時(shí)候特別要注意學(xué)生的發(fā)音,在幾次的反復(fù)對(duì)話之后,教師讓學(xué)生兩人一組練習(xí),并檢查學(xué)生說(shuō)的是否正確。如果不夠熟練就繼續(xù)練習(xí)。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6 Show it to all.接下來(lái),教師拿出自制的小秋千,做成小孩蕩秋千的樣子,然后,叫一個(gè)學(xué)生來(lái)扶著秋千,并做動(dòng)作。教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Who wants to come here and help me ? 等學(xué)生上來(lái)后,教師還是拿著兩個(gè)娃娃對(duì)話,What are they doing ? They are swinging.Are they happy? Yes, they are.教師給了幾遍示范之后,直接就可以問(wèn)學(xué)生,讓學(xué)生回答。如果學(xué)生回答時(shí)有發(fā)音等方面的錯(cuò)誤就及時(shí)糾正。教學(xué)活動(dòng)7 Practice it in pairs 然后,教師再讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行對(duì)話練習(xí),教師進(jìn)行適當(dāng)?shù)某椴椤T趯W(xué)生坐的時(shí)間比較長(zhǎng),需要活動(dòng)的時(shí)候,教師再帶著大家來(lái)進(jìn)行本單元第3部分的內(nèi)容和練習(xí)中第1部分的內(nèi)容。還是采取邊說(shuō)邊做的方法。教學(xué)活動(dòng)8 Listen and read 最后教師讓學(xué)生一起聽(tīng)錄音,朗讀最后的短文。方式是,先讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)一兩遍錄音,然后教師帶讀一兩遍,最后讓學(xué)生自己讀,全班讀。課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 1,2,3 of Unit 13 and do the actions with the tape.聽(tīng)13單元第1,2,3部分的朗讀材料,堅(jiān)持邊聽(tīng)邊做動(dòng)作。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit14 Clap our hands.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生能掌握一些簡(jiǎn)單的動(dòng)詞表達(dá)方式 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)單、復(fù)數(shù)的用法 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步學(xué)習(xí)進(jìn)行時(shí)的表達(dá)方式

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)字母Nn的發(fā)音及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第4部分所給出的句子

交際句型:Pick up the stool.Stand around the tree.Stand up and go to the door.Put down the book and bring back the knife.Who' s under the big N ? Who's on the small n? 交際詞匯:one......ten, stool, bike , bee, earaser 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Clap our hands!上課時(shí),教師首先帶著大家拍巴掌,練習(xí)各種節(jié)奏。比如,One, two/one, two, three, four five/four five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.接下來(lái),教師可以讓學(xué)生拍One, two/one, two, three, four five/four five six, seven, eight/seven eight nine.Nine, ten/ eight, nine ,ten.教師讓學(xué)生邊拍手邊說(shuō)英語(yǔ)數(shù)字。在學(xué)生有了一些熱身活動(dòng)之后,教師可以將學(xué)生帶入本單元的內(nèi)容One, two, pick up the stool.One , two ,three, stand around the tree.One, two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.One, two, three,four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.在說(shuō)這段順口溜的時(shí)候,教師可以通過(guò)動(dòng)作給學(xué)生做解釋?zhuān)部梢宰寣W(xué)生進(jìn)行實(shí)地表演。比如說(shuō),教師和學(xué)生一起說(shuō),One, two, pick up the stool.教師立刻從后面跑到講臺(tái)旁邊把小凳子拿起來(lái),接著大家一起說(shuō),One,two, three, stand around the tree.教師讓幾個(gè)孩子到前面圍一圈,圍在自制的小樹(shù)旁。當(dāng)說(shuō)到One , two, three, four, stand up and go to the door.教師示意讓大家站起來(lái),并朝門(mén)走去。最后說(shuō)到,One, two, three, four, five, put down the book and bring back the knife.教師讓學(xué)生把書(shū)放下,并到講臺(tái)前拿一把小刀,然后返回座位。解釋之后,教師要求大家輕輕拍著桌子,按照一定的節(jié)奏說(shuō),也可以先聽(tīng)錄音,然后再一起說(shuō)。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Read the words!當(dāng)學(xué)生完成第1部分之后,教師拿出練習(xí)數(shù)字的圖片(第2部分的圖片),教師首先拿出小汽車(chē)圖片,對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look , I've got a nice picture.What's this ?(學(xué)生:It's a car)Yes, it's a car.What's this ?(教師指一輛自行車(chē),)等學(xué)生回答后,教師接著問(wèn),How many bikes? 教師用類(lèi)似的方法問(wèn)學(xué)生,直到10張圖片都被問(wèn)到。接著教師拿著圖片讓學(xué)生說(shuō),one car, two bikes, three boys, four girls, five books, six pencils, seven apples, eight bananas, nine bees, ten erasers.在教師帶讀的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生自己讀,兩人一組讀,最后全班讀。當(dāng)大家都比較熟悉的時(shí)候,教師把圖片混插一下,然后抽圖片,讓學(xué)生立刻反應(yīng)它們的英文。總之,以學(xué)生多練為主。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Read and choose 學(xué)生進(jìn)行了大量的口語(yǔ)訓(xùn)練之后,教師讓學(xué)生做一些靜止的活動(dòng)。教師可以對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Now, please open your books , turn to page 56.Let's do exercise 1.Choose the best answers.You read the first sentence here , and then choose the best answers here.Later we're going to check the answers.We'll see who has got the answers correct.教師說(shuō)這番話時(shí),有些學(xué)生可能聽(tīng)不懂,教師也不必?fù)?dān)心,這些學(xué)生只要看到別人在做什么就知道該怎么做了。但教師要培養(yǎng)孩子的聽(tīng)力能力,不要說(shuō)一句英語(yǔ),再把它翻成漢語(yǔ),這樣,說(shuō)了等于沒(méi)有說(shuō),因?yàn)楹⒆右虼藭?huì)產(chǎn)生依賴(lài)的想法,總盼著教師說(shuō)中文,否則就不去思考。學(xué)生做完之后,教師可以在全班進(jìn)行檢查,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)A,另一個(gè)學(xué)生說(shuō)出正確的答案。教師可以這樣對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),OK, let's check the answers.Who wants to read A? Who wants to answer? Is it A, B, or C ? Who wants to try?這樣依次檢查。教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Ask and answer.學(xué)習(xí)字母時(shí),教師拿出事先準(zhǔn)備好的Nn 字母的大寫(xiě)和小寫(xiě),同時(shí)在大寫(xiě)字母的下方放一個(gè)孩子的圖片。教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,Who's under the big N? 接著再問(wèn)Who's on the small n ? 在學(xué)生回答問(wèn)題的基礎(chǔ)上,教師給出學(xué)生正確的發(fā)音,Nn,并帶讀幾遍,同時(shí)還說(shuō)A boy is under the big N.A monkey is on the small n.以便讓學(xué)生跟著一起說(shuō)。教師隨后讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),最后再檢查說(shuō)的效果(檢查兩三對(duì)同學(xué))。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)的還不夠好,教師應(yīng)糾正,并再給予一點(diǎn)時(shí)間進(jìn)行練習(xí)。等大家都掌握了讀音,教師再拿出字母Nn 的變形圖,用兩個(gè)娃娃來(lái)做對(duì)話表演,引出要交流的內(nèi)容。反復(fù)兩遍之后,教師問(wèn)學(xué)生,What are they doing ? Who knows ? Who can answer my question?(在學(xué)生回答上來(lái)之后,教師要給予表?yè)P(yáng))Very good.Now ,everybody.Listen carefully.I'll ask again.He/ She will answer.Listen.(在學(xué)生回答之后,教師轉(zhuǎn)過(guò)來(lái)問(wèn)全班)Yes, what are they doing, everyone ? Good.Look, What's this man doing ? He's....教師有意識(shí)地留給學(xué)生說(shuō)出來(lái),Yes, he's bending his body.Can you bend your body like this ? 在學(xué)生明白意思的基礎(chǔ)上,教師還是讓學(xué)生兩人一組進(jìn)行練習(xí),然后再抽查效果,最后,教師可以再給一點(diǎn)時(shí)間,讓學(xué)生練習(xí)幾遍。總之,讓每個(gè)學(xué)生在課堂里有充分的說(shuō)話、講英語(yǔ)的時(shí)間。課后作業(yè):

Listen to the first part of Unit 14 and read it with the tape.Bring your crayons to the classroom next time.聽(tīng)第14單元第1部分的錄音,并模仿朗讀,下次帶彩色蠟筆。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit15 I can draw it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)*使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步掌握有關(guān)水果及有關(guān)動(dòng)作的單詞 *使學(xué)生能按照指令畫(huà)出正確的圖案

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Oo及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:Draw a big house.Draw a boy in the house.What are these ? They're Easter eggs.When is the Easter ? Next week.Who can draw a banana ? I can.Can you draw a window ? No, I can't.交際詞匯:apple , orange, pear, banana, draw, colour , read , sing 教學(xué)活動(dòng)1 Show it and eat it!上課時(shí),教師首先手里拿著蘋(píng)果對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Look, I've got something today.What's this ?如果學(xué)生回答,It's an apple.教師應(yīng)說(shuō),Yes, you're right.It's an apple.Do you like apples?(注意要用復(fù)數(shù)形式)教師應(yīng)問(wèn)幾個(gè)學(xué)生,問(wèn)過(guò)幾個(gè)學(xué)生之后,教師說(shuō),Yes, I like apples, too.Now, I'm going to peel the apple.(邊說(shuō)邊削蘋(píng)果,然后自己吃一塊,表現(xiàn)出很愛(ài)吃的表情,緊接著問(wèn)學(xué)生)Do you like apples? Oh, yes, you like apples, too? OK, now, here you are.教師削一塊蘋(píng)果給學(xué)生吃,并繼續(xù)問(wèn)學(xué)生,并每人削一小塊。吃了一半以后,教師拿著蘋(píng)果和香蕉問(wèn)學(xué)生,Which do you like , apples or bananas ? 這時(shí),學(xué)生肯定要選擇一樣水果說(shuō)出來(lái),教師就可以檢查學(xué)生是否會(huì)說(shuō)。如果學(xué)生說(shuō)喜歡吃香蕉,教師也同樣削一塊香蕉給學(xué)生吃。總之,應(yīng)把要復(fù)習(xí)的水果單詞放在交流中進(jìn)行,同時(shí)可以加上其它的兩種水果,橘子和梨。在學(xué)生吃完,說(shuō)完之后,教師說(shuō),OK,now,please take out your crayons.I want you to draw pictures.Now , look at the first one.A green apple.Quick, draw a green apple here.在學(xué)生畫(huà)畫(huà)的時(shí)候,教師一定要控制時(shí)間。一般來(lái)說(shuō),一張圖只給1分鐘左右就可以了,否則會(huì)影響正常的教學(xué)。其它的圖畫(huà)也是如此。學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要做一個(gè)小小的評(píng)講,對(duì)畫(huà)得認(rèn)真的同學(xué)要進(jìn)行表?yè)P(yáng),并適當(dāng)給予幾個(gè)人鼓勵(lì),發(fā)個(gè)小貼畫(huà)等。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)2 Move it and say it.教師帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱。在說(shuō)唱的時(shí)候,如果教師把蘋(píng)果、橘子和鴨梨擺在桌上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)就比較容易。比如,先擺好蘋(píng)果,橘子和鴨梨,教師讓學(xué)生說(shuō),apple, orange, pear,然后教師馬上把橘子擺在蘋(píng)果的前面,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),orange,apple,pear,緊接著,教師再拿下橘子換上蘋(píng)果,學(xué)生就可以說(shuō),banana,apple, pear.如果教師覺(jué)得這個(gè)比較費(fèi)事,可以將這些圖實(shí)現(xiàn)畫(huà)在一張大紙上,讓學(xué)生看著說(shuō)也可以。在什么教具都沒(méi)有準(zhǔn)備的情況下,教師就用本單元的圖,也可以讓學(xué)生直接看著圖來(lái)說(shuō)。教師做教具的目的是使大家的視線比較集中,注意力比較集中,同時(shí)也給學(xué)生一個(gè)新的視覺(jué)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Guess the fruit.在讓大家說(shuō)水果的時(shí)候,教師也可以用猜的方式來(lái)讓學(xué)生猜是什么水果。教師將一個(gè)水果拿在手里放在講臺(tái)桌后面,讓學(xué)生猜,What's in my hand ? Is it a pear?等。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)4 Draw the fruit.教師讓學(xué)生認(rèn)真閱讀教材上所給的句子,按照要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。同樣,在學(xué)生畫(huà)完之后,教師要組織講評(píng),評(píng)比,看哪位同學(xué)畫(huà)的好。在學(xué)生畫(huà)完教材上的畫(huà)以后,如果有時(shí)間,教師可以讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行畫(huà)畫(huà)比賽。讓每組一個(gè)同學(xué)到黑板前,教師給指令,學(xué)生根據(jù)要求畫(huà)畫(huà)。比如,教師說(shuō),Please draw a tree.Draw one ball under the tree and one ball on the tree.Please draw a fish between the two flowers.Please draw an apple next to the pear.畫(huà)的時(shí)間長(zhǎng)短由老師來(lái)控制。但不宜太長(zhǎng),一般不要超過(guò)5分鐘的時(shí)間,然后轉(zhuǎn)入下一個(gè)活動(dòng)。此練習(xí)可以和本單元練習(xí)2相結(jié)合。教學(xué)活動(dòng)5 Chant it!教師首先拿出Oo字母的圖片,讓學(xué)生聽(tīng)這個(gè)字母的讀音,讀過(guò)幾遍之后,教師可往句子上引導(dǎo),教師可以引導(dǎo)學(xué)生說(shuō),O O O , O O O.Early in the morning, cocks crow.O O O , O O O.Day time again.It's time to go.在學(xué)生反復(fù)練習(xí)的基礎(chǔ)上,教師讓學(xué)生分組,集體,個(gè)人朗讀。最后比賽看誰(shuí)說(shuō)得好。然后,教師拿出復(fù)活節(jié)的彩蛋。教師只對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Easter Day is a holiday in America.It's on March 21st.教師可以告訴學(xué)生Easter Day 是復(fù)活節(jié)的意思,Easter egg 是把蛋涂成彩色,或直接用巧克力做成。其余內(nèi)容不必多講。重要的是讓學(xué)生進(jìn)行對(duì)話訓(xùn)練,能起到交流的作用。

教學(xué)活動(dòng)6 Listen and tick.教師首先讓學(xué)生看這六張圖,然后依次問(wèn)學(xué)生What's this ? 如碰到有學(xué)生不會(huì)的,教師要多帶領(lǐng)學(xué)生讀幾遍,并且熟悉它們的發(fā)音。然后再讓大家聽(tīng)錄音并判斷是打?qū)€是差。最后教師再?gòu)?qiáng)調(diào)一下house, horse, mouse, mouth的發(fā)音,讓大家注意看口型。課后作業(yè):

Draw three things and write their English word under each picture.任意畫(huà)三種東西,并在下面寫(xiě)上英語(yǔ)。

劍橋少兒預(yù)備級(jí)上 unit16 I can see it.教學(xué)目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)

*使學(xué)生學(xué)會(huì)使用I can see......的句型,并能做簡(jiǎn)單的問(wèn)答 *使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步復(fù)習(xí)有關(guān)動(dòng)物的詞匯

*使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Pp及所給單詞的讀音 *使學(xué)生能讀出第6部分所給出的句子 交際句型:I can see a dog What can you see? Can you see the monkeys? Yes, I can.No, I can't.交際詞匯:rabbit , snake, bird, fish ,mouse, cat, dog, monkey 具體教學(xué)方法:

上課時(shí),教師對(duì)學(xué)生說(shuō),Today we are going to do something.I'm sure you like it.Now ,everybody have a piece of paper.如果教師沒(méi)有帶紙時(shí),則說(shuō),Now ,please take out a piece of paper, like this.示意給學(xué)生看。Do as I do.Roll ,roll up the paper.Got that ? Let's do it again.Roll ,roll up the paper.這時(shí),教師邊自己卷紙邊讓學(xué)生跟著做,可以反復(fù)多次,并讓學(xué)生練習(xí)說(shuō),同時(shí)還將許多圖片或玩具放在黑板前的左側(cè),自己站在黑板的右側(cè),用卷起的紙筒邊看邊說(shuō)Roll ,roll up the paper。做完第一個(gè)動(dòng)作之后,教師接著示范第二個(gè)動(dòng)作,讓一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面來(lái),舉起一個(gè)小狗玩具,這時(shí)教師說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a dog.然后讓該同學(xué)舉起另一個(gè)玩具,這樣以此類(lèi)推。教師示范完之后,讓學(xué)生一起來(lái)認(rèn)讀這些動(dòng)物的名稱(chēng),數(shù)遍之后,教師找學(xué)生拿著紙筒站到教室的后半部,同時(shí)找另一個(gè)學(xué)生到前面為后面的同學(xué)舉圖片或?qū)嵨铮?wèn)后面的學(xué)生,What can you see ?后面的學(xué)生回答說(shuō),I can see a dog.I can see a eraser.幾分鐘后,教師再讓學(xué)生打開(kāi)書(shū),說(shuō),Now ,please open your books let's read.讀第4部分,教師可以有意識(shí)把這段內(nèi)容變成節(jié)奏型的朗讀材料,用手或腳打著節(jié)奏。之后,教師還可以用兩人一組、全班分組、男女分組的形式進(jìn)行朗讀比賽。教師說(shuō),Now,please read in pairs first(兩人一組)。OK,let's try it together.Boys read , I can see a cat.Girls read , I can see a dog.Let's try it.Very good.Now these three lines read “I can see a cat.”And these three lines read“I can see a dog.”Then, these lines again,and then these lines again.OK, let's try it.當(dāng)大家能很熟練地說(shuō)出這些句子之后,教師說(shuō),Very good.Now let's play a game.Please close your books.Close your eyes.教師讓學(xué)生閉上眼睛之后,馬上把動(dòng)物移開(kāi),桌子上或黑板上只放著或貼著若干個(gè)猴子,并問(wèn)大家,Can you see monkeys ? 重復(fù)幾遍,希望每個(gè)人都能答出Yes, I can.通常,較聰明的孩子預(yù)先看到了該課的句型或已翻書(shū)看過(guò),所以他們能回答教師所提出的問(wèn)題。這時(shí)教師拿出兩只貓的實(shí)物或圖片,讓大家看一眼并迅速藏起來(lái)問(wèn)大家,Can you see the cats ?學(xué)生可能回答No, I can't.這時(shí),教師以此做進(jìn)一步的練習(xí),讓一個(gè)學(xué)生拿個(gè)東西或圖片到前面,讓大家迅速看一眼,并用Can you see the...?的句型問(wèn)大家。最后再回到教材的第5部分,說(shuō)說(shuō)唱唱,讓學(xué)生們邊聽(tīng)錄音,邊一起說(shuō),可以不看書(shū)。活動(dòng)之后再進(jìn)行別的教學(xué)活動(dòng)。教學(xué)活動(dòng)3 Group competition 教師將全班同學(xué)分成兩個(gè)組,進(jìn)行說(shuō)句子比賽,兩邊的同學(xué)都必須用I can see...的句型說(shuō)句子,一邊說(shuō)一個(gè),輪流進(jìn)行,但一放不能重復(fù)對(duì)方說(shuō)過(guò)的句子。每說(shuō)對(duì)一個(gè)句子,教師就在黑板上給那個(gè)組記一分,但不扣分。最后看哪一個(gè)組的同學(xué)說(shuō)的句子多。教師可以用英語(yǔ)這樣說(shuō),Now, let's have a match.We devide our class into two groups.One is A, the other is B.We'll see which group can say more sentences.For example, I can see a...If you say a correct sentence, I'll write it on the blackboard.But remember you can't repeat what others have said.For example, Zhang Hua says ,''I can see a dog.“You can't say ”I can see a dog, too." Do you understand ? Let's begin.Which group wants to be the first one? 課后作業(yè):

Listen to Part 4 and Part 5 of Unit 16 and read with the tape.聽(tīng)第16單元的第4和第5部分,并跟著朗讀。

第五篇:劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案

劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案

Unit1 Greetings

ⅠTeaching aims and demands

1,使學(xué)生通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)本單元能用英語(yǔ)跟同學(xué)問(wèn)候、教師及家長(zhǎng)等打招呼

2,是學(xué)生出入接觸英語(yǔ)的語(yǔ)音、語(yǔ)調(diào)和節(jié)奏

3,是學(xué)生能初步掌握本單元中出現(xiàn)的幾個(gè)單詞的短語(yǔ) ⅡExpressions in communication 1,Good morning!/Morning!2,Say hello to Teddy Bear!3,Hello!Hi!

ⅢKey words and expressions

Hello,moring,Monkey Munchy, Panda Pandy ,Dog Doffy, Cat Catty,Teddy Bear ⅣMaterials for teaching

Some pictures about animals or toys Lesson1

Step1 Self-introudutions

Ok.From now on,I will be your English teacher.I am___。Please read after me!Step 2 Say requests

(具體要求具體制定)Step 3 Something about beginning the class

How are you today ? → I am fine, thank you, how are you or and you>

注:點(diǎn)名時(shí)說(shuō):I am here.Step 4 Teach orders

(1)Clap your hands, one two three

Stamp your feet, one two three

(2)Are you ready?

Go!Go!Go!(3)Nod your head,Yes!Yes!Yes!

Shake your head,No!No!No!

Step 5

Giving names Step 6

Greetings

Drawing some pictures about the three tines of the day to teach(Good morning!/Morning!Good afternoon!Hello!Hi!Good evening!)At last using the names to practice the greetings.Step 7 Homework

抄寫(xiě)自己的名字每個(gè)三排每排五個(gè),用英語(yǔ)和父母打招呼。Lesson2

Step1 Review the greetings Step 2 mew words

Monkey Munchy, Panda Pandy ,Dog Doffy, Cat Catty,Teddy Bear

Step 3 mew sentences

Say hello to Teddy Bear

Step 4 let us chant and sing

Listen to the tape and chang or sing after the tape,using the pictures to remember the chant.Step 5

Homework

(自定)

Unit8 Play and score ⅠTeaching aims and demands 1,使學(xué)生進(jìn)一步鞏固和復(fù)習(xí)前面所學(xué)的字母

2,學(xué)習(xí)新字母和相關(guān)單詞

3,進(jìn)行一次有關(guān)字母的綜合復(fù)習(xí)ⅡExpressions in communication 1,Aa is for apple 2,What is behind the clouds? 3,The rabbit is behind the cloulds Ⅲ Expressions in communication Umbrella vest window watermelon Lesson 1

Step1 Greetings Step 2 Leading out this unit of using the questions Boys and Girls, when you come to our school, what present have you got?(傘)You know this in Chinese ,but who can tell me how to say this in English? So, today let us learn unit 8 play and score.Step 3 new letters(Uu Vv Ww)1,Now listen carefully, let us see who can catch the sound of the word quicky, T say the letter slowy and write the big letteron the blackboard.At last teaching how to say and how to write.2,Now let us see this letter.It is the letter Vv.T using different sound to say the letter.3, Look I have got one more letter for you today.This is the letter W.Listen W ,then teaching how to say and write? Steop 4 new words Umbrella vest window watermelon

Using the letters to leading out the words Step 5 writing

Writing the letters in book.Step 6 draw and colour 運(yùn)用引導(dǎo)的語(yǔ)氣說(shuō):“U is for、、、、,Yes, umbrella.Ok, who can draw an umbrella on the blackboard? W is for、、、、Yes, window.Who want to have a try and draw a window on the blankboard? V is for、、、、,Yes, vest.Who want to have a try and draw a vest on the blankboard? Please look at part 6,draw and colour.Step 7 Homework 每個(gè)字母三排每排五個(gè)等。Lesson2 Step1 Review the letters and words Step2 Listen point and say This is a game.T let the Ss to become two teams, Team one say the letters or the wors one by one.Team two say the letters from w to a.Let us see which team is the winner., Then, we can play the match with two students as a group.At last, listehn to the tape and point the letter.Step3 new sentences 1,Aa is for apple First, T leading to the Ss to read the letters and the words together, then match.Two Ss as a group, according to the letters to say the words.Two teams make the match, to see which team is the best.2, What is behind the clouds? The rabbit is behind the cloulds

Look at part 3 let us guess.From left to right.Let us see what is behind the clouds? First, T ask from the left to right.Ss answer.At last, T can ask T1 ask T2 or T2 ask T1.Then ask them to write the words in their books.Step 4 Game(1)T say A ,Ss say B.And so on Step 5 Homework(自定)Lesson3 Step1 Review Step 2 sing

First, lead to the Ss to read part5 together, Second, listen to the tape and sing zfter it Third, learn the song.Step3 match to sing the song(1)Boys sing(2)Girls sing(3)Sing together Step 4 let us piay First, T takes the pictures and put it on the blackboard, then put a thing to fill in the things in front of the classromm ,let the Ss to far from a place ,let the thing to the box, if you can put the things in the box ,you can take a word on the blackboard and say it.Step 5 Homework(自定)

下載劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案word格式文檔
下載劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)全冊(cè)教案.doc
將本文檔下載到自己電腦,方便修改和收藏,請(qǐng)勿使用迅雷等下載。
點(diǎn)此處下載文檔

文檔為doc格式


聲明:本文內(nèi)容由互聯(lián)網(wǎng)用戶自發(fā)貢獻(xiàn)自行上傳,本網(wǎng)站不擁有所有權(quán),未作人工編輯處理,也不承擔(dān)相關(guān)法律責(zé)任。如果您發(fā)現(xiàn)有涉嫌版權(quán)的內(nèi)容,歡迎發(fā)送郵件至:645879355@qq.com 進(jìn)行舉報(bào),并提供相關(guān)證據(jù),工作人員會(huì)在5個(gè)工作日內(nèi)聯(lián)系你,一經(jīng)查實(shí),本站將立刻刪除涉嫌侵權(quán)內(nèi)容。

相關(guān)范文推薦

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案上冊(cè)Unit1教案

    Unit 1 Greetings Teaching aims and demands: *使學(xué)生能用簡(jiǎn)單的英語(yǔ)跟別人打招呼 *使學(xué)生能分別說(shuō)出早晨好、下午好及晚上好的問(wèn)候用語(yǔ) *使學(xué)生能模仿發(fā)出字母Aa及所給單......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)unit1教案

    Greeting教案 一.課題內(nèi)容:Unit 1 Greeting 二.教學(xué)目標(biāo): 1、使學(xué)生能用簡(jiǎn)單的英語(yǔ)Hello,Hi跟別人打招呼 2、使學(xué)生能分別說(shuō)出早晨好(Good morning!)、下午好(Good afternoon!及晚......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上教案

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上教案 Unit 2 Beginning sounds 教學(xué)目的和要求: 本單元通過(guò)學(xué)習(xí)幾個(gè)常用的單詞來(lái)學(xué)習(xí)英語(yǔ)的前三個(gè)字母,Aa,Bb,Cc 讓學(xué)生初步接觸一下英語(yǔ),包括英語(yǔ)的語(yǔ)音和......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)unit5教案

    The falling letters教案 一,教學(xué)內(nèi)容 1,L,M,N三個(gè)字母 2,lemon, mango, nose三個(gè)單詞 3,句型This is the letter... Eg:this is the letter L. 二,教學(xué)目標(biāo) 1,認(rèn)識(shí)字母L,M,N三個(gè)......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案上冊(cè)Unit 1教案

    黃牛課件網(wǎng) http://www.tmdps.cn新課標(biāo)免費(fèi)資源網(wǎng)(無(wú)須注冊(cè),免費(fèi)下載) Unit 1 Greetings Teaching aims and demands: *使學(xué)生能用簡(jiǎn)單的英語(yǔ)跟別人打招呼 *使學(xué)生能......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)Unit1教案(5篇)

    Unit 1 Greetings. 教學(xué)目的 學(xué)會(huì)并熟練運(yùn)用4種打招呼的方式. Hi. Hello. Morning. Good morning. 5種動(dòng)物單詞以及名字。 teddy bear cat dog panda monkey Catty D......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)教案上冊(cè)Unit 2教案

    Unit 2 Who is the first? Teaching aims and demands: *使學(xué)生能聽(tīng)懂英語(yǔ)說(shuō)的簡(jiǎn)單口令,并能做動(dòng)作 *使學(xué)生能分別做出Stand up.sit down,come here,go back的動(dòng)作,并知道英......

    劍橋少兒英語(yǔ)預(yù)備級(jí)上冊(cè)u(píng)nit 1教案

    Class begins, 先把你們的作業(yè)本拿出來(lái),看一下大家有沒(méi)有做,好,very good. 現(xiàn)在我們來(lái)復(fù)習(xí)一下,上節(jié)課,我們都學(xué)到什么呢? 1. say hello to …..向某人問(wèn)好----重點(diǎn)再?gòu)?fù)習(xí)一下, 我......

主站蜘蛛池模板: 好男人在线社区www在线观看视频| 韩国无码无遮挡在线观看| 久久精品中文无码资源站| 日韩精品无码久久一区二区三| 欧美大片aaaaa免费观看| 蜜桃视频在线观看免费视频网站www| 久久精品国产亚洲αv忘忧草| 天天射天天日本一道| 精品一区二区三区在线播放视频| 亚洲欧美日韩另类精品一区| 亚洲天堂男人影院| 国产精品成人av片免费看| 日本一区二区三区专线| 情人伊人久久综合亚洲| 国产精品无码2021在线观看| 中文字幕色av一区二区三区| 久久精品国产日本波多野结衣| 一本一道vs无码中文字幕| 国产野战无套av毛片| 国产成人片无码视频在线观看| 亚洲国产精品久久久久秋霞| 成人无码在线视频网站| 成年av动漫网站久久| 亚洲依依成人亚洲社区| 超薄丝袜足j好爽在线观看| 国产亚洲精品久久久闺蜜| 亚洲人人玩人人添人人| 东京热加勒比视频一区| 东京道一本热中文字幕| 亚洲中文字幕一二三四区苍井空| 亚洲日本韩国欧美云霸高清| 国产精成人品日日拍夜夜免费| 99精品国产高清一区二区| 任你躁x7x7x7x7在线观看| 亚洲色大成网站www永久男同| 亚洲精品中文字幕制| 性欧美丰满熟妇xxxx性| 97人妻中文字幕总站| 国内揄拍国内精品少妇| 欧美疯狂性受xxxxx喷水| 内射人妻少妇无码一本一道|